KX-Tes824 Feature Guide

Advanced Hybrid System
Feature Guide
Model
KX-TES824 KX-TEM824
Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Advanced Hybrid System. Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
Introduction
About this Feature Guide
The Feature Guide is designed to serve as an overall reference describing the features of the Panasonic Advanced Hybrid System. It explains what the Advanced Hybrid System can do, as well as how to obtain the most of its many features and facilities. The Feature Guide is divided into the following sections:
Section 1, Call Handling Features

Describes the features of the Advanced Hybrid System related to making and receiving calls, and operating telephones.
Section 2, System Configuration and Administration Features

Describes the features that allow the Advanced Hybrid System to be configured and administered to suit the needs of its users.
Section 3, Programming Instructions

Serves as an overall system programming reference for the Advanced Hybrid System.
Section 4, Appendix
Provides tables that describe the resource capacity of the Advanced Hybrid System, as well as its different tones and ring tones.
Index
References Found in the Feature Guide

Installation Manual References
The Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX. Sections from the Installation Manual are listed throughout the Feature Guide for your reference.
Feature Guide References

Related sections of the Feature Guide are listed for your reference.
User Manual References

The User Manual describes how users can access commonly used PBX features and functions with their proprietary telephones (PTs), single line telephones (SLTs), and Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles. Sections from the User Manual are listed throughout the Feature Guide for your reference.
PT Programming References
Commonly used settings can be programmed using a display PT ( 2.3.2 PT Programming). These PT programming items are noted throughout the Feature Guide for your reference by title and programme number. The following is an example of a PT Programming reference: "Idle extensions are automatically searched for according to a preprogrammed hunting type ( Hunting Type [101])."
Feature Guide
Links to Other Pages and Manuals

If you are viewing this Feature Guide with a PC, certain items are linked to different sections of the Feature Guide and other Advanced Hybrid System manuals. Click on a link to jump to that section. Linked items include: Installation Manual References Feature Guide References User Manual References PT Programming References
Notes
Certain PTs, features, and optional service cards are not available in some areas. Consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. Every system programming setting can be accessed using a PC and the Panasonic KX-TE Maintenance Console software ( 2.3.1 PC Programming). For programming details, refer to the online help that is installed along with KX-TE Maintenance Console ( 3.2.1 Installing and Starting KXTE Maintenance Console).
The KX-TES824E, the KX-TES824NE, the KX-TES824GR/KX-TEM824GR, the KX-TES824CE/KX-TEM824CE, and the KX-TES824PD/KX-TEM824PD are designed to interwork with the Analogue Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) of European countries.
Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd./Panasonic Communications Company (U.K.) Ltd. declares that this equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) Directive 1999/5/EC. Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available for download by visiting:
http://doc.panasonic.de
Contact: Panasonic Services Europe GmbH Panasonic Testing Centre Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, F.R. Germany
Trademarks
Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Intel and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
Feature Guide
List of Abbreviations
A
AA APT ARS Automated Attendant Analogue Proprietary Telephone Automatic Route Selection Background Music Busy Station Signalling Built-in Voice Message Class of Service Calling Party Control Direct In Line Direct Inward System Access Do Not Disturb Distinctive Ring Detection Direct Station Selection Dual Tone Multi-Frequency External Feature Access Call Forwarding Group-CO Intercept RoutingNo Answer Live Call Screening Light Emitting Diode Other-CO Outgoing Message Programmable Feature Public Switched Telephone Network Proprietary Telephone Single-CO Single Line Telephone Station Message Detail Recording Short Message Service Toll Restriction Telephone Answering Machine Uniform Call Distribution Voice Mail Voice Processing System
BGM BSS BV
C D
COS CPC DIL DISA DND DRD DSS DTMF
E F G I L O P
EFA FWD G-CO IRNA LCS LED O-CO OGM PF PSTN PT
S-CO SLT SMDR SMS
T U V
TRS TAM UCD VM VPS
Feature Guide
Feature Highlights
Built-in Voice Message (BV) (Optional voice message card required) Built-in Voice Message (BV) allows a caller to leave a voice message in a user's personal message area or the PBX's common message area ( 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)). Call Routing for Fixed Line SMS (Optional Caller ID card required) The PBX can relay incoming calls from a Short Message Service (SMS) centre to specific single line telephones (SLTs) that support SMS. Fixed Line SMS is a service that allows text messages to be sent and received via Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) access ( 1.17.3 Call Routing for Fixed Line SMS). Caller ID Display on SLT (Optional Caller ID card required) The PBX can receive Caller ID information (telephone numbers and callers' names) from calls received on outside (CO) lines. This information can be shown on the displays of some SLTs as well as proprietary telephones (PTs) when receiving calls ( 1.16.1 Caller ID). 3-level Automated Attendant (AA) 3-level Automated Attendant (AA) service allows a caller to dial a single-digit number (Direct Inward System Access [DISA] AA number) following the guidance of 3-level DISA outgoing messages (OGMs), and be connected to the desired party automatically ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)). PC Programming System programming settings can be accessed using a PC and the Panasonic KX-TE Maintenance Console software as well as by using a PT ( 2.3.1 PC Programming). The PBX software can be upgraded via the Serial Interface (RS-232C port) or USB port, using the KX-TE Maintenance Console software ( 2.3.7 Firmware Upgrade). Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type The dialling mode of connected outside (CO) lines is automatically configured the first time the PBX is accessed with a PC using the KX-TE Maintenance Console software, or after the PBX data has been cleared ( 2.3.5 Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type). Advanced Hybrid System This PBX supports the connection of PTs*1, Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles, and single line devices such as SLTs, fax machines, wireless telephones, and data terminals.
*1
In this manual, "proprietary telephone" ("PT") means an analogue proprietary telephone (APT).
Feature Guide
Table of Contents
1 Call Handling Features......................................................................... 13
Incoming Call Features..................................................................................................14 Incoming Outside (CO) Line Call Features ......................................................................14
Direct In Line (DIL) .......................................................................................................................................... 14 Intercept Routing ............................................................................................................................................. 15
1.1 1.1.1
1.1.1.1 1.1.1.2
1.1.2 1.1.3
1.1.3.1 1.1.3.2 1.1.3.3 1.1.3.4 1.1.3.5
Internal Call Features.......................................................................................................16 Incoming Call Indication Features .................................................................................... 17

Incoming Call Indication FeaturesOVERVIEW............................................................................................. 17 Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection............................................................................................................... 18 Ring Tone Pattern Selection ............................................................................................................................ 19 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand ......................................................................................... 20 Call Waiting ..................................................................................................................................................... 22
1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.3 1.3.1

1.3.1.1 1.3.1.2 1.3.1.3
Receiving Group Features ............................................................................................ 23 Idle Extension Hunting .....................................................................................................23 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) .......................................................................................25 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring ......................................................................28 Log-in/Log-out ..................................................................................................................29 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features .............................................30 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND).................................................................30
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)OVERVIEW.......................................................................... 30 Call Forwarding (FWD) .................................................................................................................................... 31 Do Not Disturb (DND)...................................................................................................................................... 34
1.4 1.4.1
1.4.1.1 1.4.1.2 1.4.1.3 1.4.1.4
Answering Features.......................................................................................................35 Answering Features .........................................................................................................35

Answering FeaturesOVERVIEW .................................................................................................................. 35 Line PreferenceIncoming ............................................................................................................................. 36 Call Pickup....................................................................................................................................................... 37 Hands-free Answerback .................................................................................................................................. 38
1.5 1.5.1
1.5.1.1
Making Call Features .....................................................................................................39 Intercom Call Features .....................................................................................................39

Intercom Call ................................................................................................................................................... 39
1.5.2
1.5.2.1 1.5.2.2 1.5.2.3 1.5.2.4 1.5.2.5 1.5.2.6 1.5.2.7
Outside (CO) Line Call Features ......................................................................................41

Outside (CO) Line Call FeaturesOVERVIEW............................................................................................... 41 Emergency Call ............................................................................................................................................... 42 Account Code Entry ........................................................................................................................................ 43 Dial Type Selection .......................................................................................................................................... 44 Reverse Circuit ................................................................................................................................................ 45 Pause Insertion................................................................................................................................................ 46 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) .................................. 47
1.5.3
1.5.3.1 1.5.3.2 1.5.3.3
Seizing a Line Features ...................................................................................................49

Seizing a Line FeaturesOVERVIEW ............................................................................................................ 49 Line PreferenceOutgoing ............................................................................................................................. 50 Outside (CO) Line Access ............................................................................................................................... 51
1.6 1.6.1
1.6.1.1 1.6.1.2 1.6.1.3 1.6.1.4 1.6.1.5 1.6.1.6 1.6.1.7
Memory Dialling Features ............................................................................................. 53 Memory Dialling Features ................................................................................................53

Memory Dialling FeaturesOVERVIEW ......................................................................................................... 53 One-touch Dialling ........................................................................................................................................... 55 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling.......................................................................................................................... 56 Redial ............................................................................................................................................................. 57 Speed DiallingPersonal/System................................................................................................................... 58 Quick Dialling................................................................................................................................................... 59 Hot Line ........................................................................................................................................................... 60
Feature Guide
1.7 1.7.1 1.7.2 1.7.3 1.8 1.8.1 1.8.2 1.8.3 1.8.4 1.9 1.9.1 1.10 1.10.1 1.10.2 1.10.3 1.10.4 1.10.5 1.10.6 1.10.7 1.10.8 1.10.9 1.10.10 1.11 1.11.1 1.12 1.12.1 1.12.2 1.12.3 1.12.4 1.12.5 1.13 1.13.1
1.13.1.1 1.13.1.2
Busy Line/Busy Party Features.................................................................................... 61 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)............................................................................... 61 Executive Busy Override ................................................................................................. 62 Call Waiting Tone............................................................................................................. 63 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features .................................................................................... 64 Toll Restriction (TRS)....................................................................................................... 64 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code ........................................................... 68 Extension Lock ................................................................................................................ 70 Walking COS ................................................................................................................... 71 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features ................................................................ 72 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) ................................................................................... 72 Conversation Features.................................................................................................. 78 Hands-free Operation ...................................................................................................... 78 Room Monitor .................................................................................................................. 79 Microphone Mute............................................................................................................. 80 Headset Operation .......................................................................................................... 81 Data Line Security ........................................................................................................... 82 Flash/Recall..................................................................................................................... 83 External Feature Access (EFA) ....................................................................................... 84 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation .................................................................................... 85 Parallelled Telephone ...................................................................................................... 86 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection ................................................................. 87 Transferring Features.................................................................................................... 88 Call Transfer..................................................................................................................... 88 Holding Features ........................................................................................................... 90 Call Hold .......................................................................................................................... 90 Call Park .......................................................................................................................... 92 Call Splitting..................................................................................................................... 93 Music on Hold.................................................................................................................. 94 Consultation Hold ............................................................................................................ 95 Conference Features..................................................................................................... 96 Conference Features ....................................................................................................... 96
Conference FeaturesOVERVIEW.................................................................................................................96 Conference ......................................................................................................................................................97
1.14 1.14.1 1.15 1.15.1 1.15.2 1.15.3 1.15.4 1.15.5 1.15.6 1.15.7 1.16 1.16.1 1.16.2 1.17 1.17.1 1.17.2 1.17.3
Paging Features............................................................................................................. 99 Paging ............................................................................................................................. 99 Optional Device Features ........................................................................................... 100 Doorphone Call ............................................................................................................. 100 Door Open ..................................................................................................................... 101 Doorbell/Door Chime ..................................................................................................... 102 Background Music (BGM) ............................................................................................. 104 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD ..................................................................... 105 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ............................................................................ 106 Built-in Voice Message (BV) .......................................................................................... 114 Caller ID Features ........................................................................................................ 119 Caller ID......................................................................................................................... 119 Incoming Call Log.......................................................................................................... 123 Message Features ....................................................................................................... 126 Message Waiting ........................................................................................................... 126 Absent Message............................................................................................................ 128 Call Routing for Fixed Line SMS.................................................................................... 129
Feature Guide 7
1.18 1.18.1 1.18.2 1.18.3 1.18.4 1.19 1.19.1 1.19.2 1.20 1.20.1 1.20.2 1.21 1.21.1 1.21.2 1.22 1.22.1 1.22.2
Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features ......................................................................... 133 Fixed Buttons ................................................................................................................. 133 Flexible Buttons..............................................................................................................135 LED Indication................................................................................................................137 Display Information.........................................................................................................139 Voice Mail Features ...................................................................................................... 140 Voice Mail APT Integration ............................................................................................. 140 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration............................................................................146 Administrative Information Output Features.............................................................149 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)...................................................................149 Call Log Printout for Each Extension .............................................................................154 Extension Controlling Features .................................................................................. 155 Extension Feature Clear ................................................................................................155 Timed Reminder.............................................................................................................156 Audible Tone Features................................................................................................. 157 Dial Tone ........................................................................................................................157 Confirmation Tone ..........................................................................................................158
System Configuration and Administration Features ...................... 159

System ConfigurationHardware ..............................................................................160 Extension Jack Configuration......................................................................................... 160 System ConfigurationSoftware ...............................................................................161 Class of Service (COS) .................................................................................................. 161 Group .............................................................................................................................162 Time Service ..................................................................................................................164 Operator/Manager Features........................................................................................... 167 System Data Control....................................................................................................169 PC Programming............................................................................................................169 PT Programming ............................................................................................................172 Automatic Time Adjustment ........................................................................................... 174 Feature Numbering ........................................................................................................ 175 Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type .....................................................180 Country Setting ..............................................................................................................181 Firmware Upgrade .........................................................................................................182 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics ........................................................................................183 Power Failure Transfer....................................................................................................183 Power Failure Restart.....................................................................................................184
2.1 2.1.1 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2
Programming Instructions................................................................. 185

Introduction ..................................................................................................................186 Introduction ....................................................................................................................186 PC Programming .......................................................................................................... 187 Installing and Starting KX-TE Maintenance Console .....................................................187 PT Programming .......................................................................................................... 188 Programming Instructions ..............................................................................................188 Programming Procedures ..............................................................................................193
Date & Time [000].......................................................................................................................................... 193 System Speed Dialling Number [001]............................................................................................................ 193 System Password [002] ................................................................................................................................. 194 DSS Console Jack Assignment [003] ............................................................................................................ 195 Console Paired Telephone [004].................................................................................................................... 195 One-touch Transfer Using a DSS Button [005] .............................................................................................. 195
3.1 3.1.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2
Feature Guide
Time Service Switching Mode [006] ..............................................................................................................196 Time Service Start Time [007] .......................................................................................................................196 Operator Assignment [008] ............................................................................................................................196 Extension Number [009] ................................................................................................................................197 LCD Time Display [010] .................................................................................................................................197 System Speed Dialling Name [011] ...............................................................................................................198 Second Feature Numbering Plan [012]..........................................................................................................198 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling [013] ...............................................................................................................199 Hunting Group Set [100] ................................................................................................................................199 Hunting Type [101] .........................................................................................................................................199 DTMF Integration Port [102] ..........................................................................................................................200 DTMF Integration [103] ..................................................................................................................................200 SLT Hold Mode [104] .....................................................................................................................................200 Conference Tone [105]...................................................................................................................................200 External Pager Access Tone [106].................................................................................................................201 DTMF Receiver Check [107]..........................................................................................................................201 Flash/Recall Mode for a Locked Extension [108]...........................................................................................201 CO Indicator [109]..........................................................................................................................................201 Flash/Recall Key Mode [110] .........................................................................................................................202 Music on Hold [111] .......................................................................................................................................202 DSS Lamp Mode [112] ..................................................................................................................................202 Automatic Redial Repeat Count [113]............................................................................................................202 Automatic Redial Interval [114] ......................................................................................................................203 Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115] ................................................................................................................203 Conference Pattern [116]...............................................................................................................................203 Call Pickup Tone [117] ...................................................................................................................................203 Pulse Restriction [118]...................................................................................................................................204 Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion [119] ............................................................................................204 Bell Frequency [120] ......................................................................................................................................204 Automatic Line Access [121]..........................................................................................................................204 Automatic Rotation for CO Line Access [122]................................................................................................204 Break Ratio [123] ...........................................................................................................................................205 TRS Check for * and # [125] ..........................................................................................................................205 DSS Off-hook Mode [126]..............................................................................................................................205 Pickup Group [127] ........................................................................................................................................205 Ringback Tone Pattern [128]..........................................................................................................................205 VM 1 APT Port [130] ......................................................................................................................................206 VM 2 APT Port [131] ......................................................................................................................................206 SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142] .........................................................................................................................206 SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143] ..........................................................................................................................207 SMS Centre Number for Receiving [145].......................................................................................................207 SMS Routing TableCO [146] ......................................................................................................................207 SMS Routing TableExtension [147]............................................................................................................208 SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150]................................................................................................................208 SLT Caller ID Line Access Number [151] ......................................................................................................208 Automatic Time Adjustment [152] ..................................................................................................................208 Incoming Reverse [153] .................................................................................................................................208 Hold Recall Time [200] ..................................................................................................................................209 Transfer Recall Time [201] .............................................................................................................................209 Call Forwarding Start Time [202] ...................................................................................................................209 Hot Line Waiting Time [203]...........................................................................................................................209 Call Duration Counter Start [204]...................................................................................................................209 CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205] ................................................................................................................210 Dialling Start Time [206] ................................................................................................................................210 Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207] ..........................................................................................................210 Inter-digit Time [208]......................................................................................................................................210 DTMF Time [210]...........................................................................................................................................211 No Dial Disconnection [211] ..........................................................................................................................211 Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212]......................................................................................................211 Bell-off Detection [213] ..................................................................................................................................211
Feature Guide
BV Recording Time [214] .............................................................................................................................. 211 Common/Personal BV OGM Recording Time [215] ...................................................................................... 212 Carrier Exception Code [300] ........................................................................................................................ 212 TRSSystem Speed Dialling Class [301]..................................................................................................... 212 TRSCOS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305]........................................................................................................ 212 TRSException Code [306] ......................................................................................................................... 213 Emergency Number [309].............................................................................................................................. 213 Account Code [310] ....................................................................................................................................... 213 Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311] .......................................................................................................... 214 TRSExtension Lock Class [312] ................................................................................................................ 214 ARS Selection [350] ...................................................................................................................................... 214 Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354] ............................................................................................................. 214 Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358] ............................................................................................................ 215 1st Carrier Selection Code [359] ................................................................................................................... 215 ARS ModificationRemoved Digits [360] ..................................................................................................... 215 ARS ModificationAdded Number [361] ...................................................................................................... 216 ARS Dial Tone [362] ...................................................................................................................................... 216 ARS Inter-digit Time [363] ............................................................................................................................. 216 ARS CO Line Group [364] ............................................................................................................................. 216 Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384] ....................................................................................................... 217 Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388] ............................................................................................................. 217 Itemised Billing Code [389]............................................................................................................................ 217 Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order [390]..................................................................................... 218 CO Line Connection [400] ............................................................................................................................. 218 Dial Mode [401] ............................................................................................................................................. 218 Pulse Speed [402] ......................................................................................................................................... 219 Host PBX Access Code [403]........................................................................................................................ 219 CO Line Group Number [404]........................................................................................................................ 219 Flexible Outward DiallingDay/Night/Lunch [405-407]................................................................................. 220 Flexible RingingDay/Night/Lunch [408-410]............................................................................................... 220 Delayed RingingDay/Night/Lunch [411-413] .............................................................................................. 221 CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416] ................................................................................................. 221 Pause Time [417] .......................................................................................................................................... 223 Flash/Recall Time [418]................................................................................................................................. 223 Automatic Designated Line Access [419] ...................................................................................................... 223 CPC Signal DetectionIncoming [420]......................................................................................................... 224 CPC Signal DetectionOutgoing [421]......................................................................................................... 224 Disconnect Time [422]................................................................................................................................... 224 CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]................................................................................................................... 225 Polarity Reverse Detection [424] ................................................................................................................... 225 Collect Call Block [425] (Brazil only).............................................................................................................. 226 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only) ........................................................................ 226 DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension AssignmentDay/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand only).................... 227 DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension AssignmentDay/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand only).................... 227 DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434] (New Zealand only).................................................................... 228 DISA IRNA to BVDay/Night/Lunch [438-440] ............................................................................................ 228 DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500] ............................................................................................................. 228 DISA Built-in AA [501] ................................................................................................................................... 229 FAX Connection [503].................................................................................................................................... 229 DISA Delayed Answer Time [504] ................................................................................................................. 229 DISA Wait Time after OGM [505] .................................................................................................................. 229 DISA Busy Mode [506] .................................................................................................................................. 230 DISA Intercept Mode [507] ............................................................................................................................ 230 DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508].......................................................................................................... 230 DISA Ring Time after Intercept [509]............................................................................................................. 230 DISA No Dial Mode [510] .............................................................................................................................. 231 DISA Security Mode [511] ............................................................................................................................. 231 DISA Security Code [512] ............................................................................................................................. 231 Cyclic Tone Detection [513] ........................................................................................................................... 232 FAX Tone Detection [514].............................................................................................................................. 232
10
Feature Guide
Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515] ...........................................................................................................232 DISA Incoming Assignment [516] ..................................................................................................................232 DISA AA Wait Time [517]...............................................................................................................................233 DISA Tone after Security Code [518].............................................................................................................233 OGM Mute Time [519] ...................................................................................................................................233 UCD Group [520] ...........................................................................................................................................233 UCD Busy Waiting Time [521] .......................................................................................................................233 UCD OGM Message Interval Time [522] .......................................................................................................234 UCD Busy Mode [523] ...................................................................................................................................234 UCD Intercept Mode [524] .............................................................................................................................234 UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525]...........................................................................................................234 UCD Ring Time after Intercept [526] .............................................................................................................234 UCD Waiting Message [527]..........................................................................................................................235 DISA Security Code Digits [530]....................................................................................................................235 DISA Ringback Tone [531].............................................................................................................................235 3-level AA Assignment [540-549]...................................................................................................................235 Clear All OGMs of DISA/UCD [599]...............................................................................................................236 Extension Group [600] ...................................................................................................................................236 TRS-COSDay/Night/Lunch [601-603] ........................................................................................................236 Extension Name [604] ...................................................................................................................................237 Account Code Mode [605] .............................................................................................................................237 Call Transfer to CO Line [606]........................................................................................................................237 Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]...................................................................................................................238 Executive Busy Override [608].......................................................................................................................238 DND Override [609] .......................................................................................................................................238 Parallelled Telephone [610]............................................................................................................................239 TAM Extension [611] ......................................................................................................................................239 Room Monitor [612] .......................................................................................................................................239 CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613]...........................................................................................................240 Internal Pulse Detection [614]........................................................................................................................240 LCD Language [615]......................................................................................................................................240 Extension Name in Cyrillic [616] ....................................................................................................................241 Message Waiting for Another Extension [618] ...............................................................................................241 SLT Message Waiting [619] ...........................................................................................................................242 LCS Recording Mode Set [620] .....................................................................................................................242 BV Resource [621].........................................................................................................................................242 BV for Extension [622] ...................................................................................................................................243 BV Access Code through CO Line [625] .......................................................................................................243 BGM Control for APT [626] ............................................................................................................................243 SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call [627]..........................................................................................................244 SLT Caller ID [628].........................................................................................................................................244 SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629] ..........................................................................................................................244 Doorphone RingingDay/Night/Lunch [700-702] .........................................................................................245 Door OpenerDay/Night/Lunch [703-705]....................................................................................................245 Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706] ..............................................................................................................246 Doorphone Access Tone [707].......................................................................................................................246 Doorphone Ring Time [708]...........................................................................................................................246 Door Open Duration [709]..............................................................................................................................247 Doorphone Ring/Chime [710] ........................................................................................................................247 Doorphone Chime Assignment [711].............................................................................................................247 Doorphone Chime Pattern [712] ....................................................................................................................248 SMDR RS-232C Parameter [800] ..................................................................................................................248 SMDR Parameter [801]..................................................................................................................................249 Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802] ......................................................................................249 Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression [803].............................................................................................249 System Data Dump [804]...............................................................................................................................249 SMDR Account Code [805]............................................................................................................................250 SMDR Language [806] ..................................................................................................................................250 BV Total Recording Time [807] ......................................................................................................................250 BV Card Initialisation [808] ............................................................................................................................251
Feature Guide
11
Caller ID [900]................................................................................................................................................ 251 Caller ID Area Code [901] ............................................................................................................................. 251 Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902].................................................................................................... 252 Caller ID Modification for Long-distance Calls [903]...................................................................................... 252 Caller ID Log Priority [904] ............................................................................................................................ 252 Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition [905].............................................................................................................. 253 Caller ID SMDR Format [906]........................................................................................................................ 253 Caller ID SMDR Printout [907] ...................................................................................................................... 253 Common Area Call Log Check [909] ............................................................................................................. 253 Caller ID Type [910] ....................................................................................................................................... 254 Call Log Next Page [927] .............................................................................................................................. 254 SMDR Mode for Printing [929] ...................................................................................................................... 254 Call Forwarding Selection [963]..................................................................................................................... 254 TRS Check after Answering [966] ................................................................................................................. 255 TRS Check Time after Answering [967] ........................................................................................................ 255 KX-T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control [968] ............................................................................................ 255 Country [995]................................................................................................................................................. 255 Firmware Version [998].................................................................................................................................. 256 System Data Clear [999] ............................................................................................................................... 256
Appendix ............................................................................................. 257

Capacity of System Resources...................................................................................258 Capacity of System Resources ......................................................................................258 Tones/Ring Tones.........................................................................................................260 Tones/Ring Tones...........................................................................................................260
4.1 4.1.1 4.2 4.2.1
Index .......................................................................................................... 265
12
Feature Guide
Section
Call Handling Features
Feature Guide
13
1.1 Incoming Call Features
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.1.1
Incoming Call Features

Incoming Outside (CO) Line Call Features
Direct In Line (DIL)
Description
Directs incoming outside (CO) line calls to a preprogrammed destination based on the outside (CO) line carrying the call. Each outside (CO) line can have a different destination for each time service mode. [Programming Example] The table can be programmed for each outside (CO) line. Distribution method and destination* Outside (CO) Line No. Day 1 2 (Cont.) : : 8 * DIL DIL : : Normal 101 103 : : DIL DIL : : Normal Lunch 102 103 : : DIL DIL : : Normal Night 102 103 : :
CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416]
In this example: If an outside (CO) line call is received on outside (CO) line 1:
a) In day mode: Direct In Line (DIL) distribution is assigned. The call is routed to its DIL destination,
extension 101.
b) In lunch/night mode: DIL distribution is assigned. The call is routed to its DIL destination, extension
102.
Conditions
To use this feature, "DIL" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port. When "Normal" is selected, an incoming outside (CO) line call is received at the extensions assigned in Flexible RingingDay/Night/Lunch [408-410]. This outside (CO) line can be used by multiple extension users to make calls, but can only be used by a single extension to receive calls. If a DIL destination is an extension within an extension group that has enabled the Idle Extension Hunting feature and it is busy, the Idle Extension Hunting feature becomes active ( 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting).

2.2.3 Time Service
14
Feature Guide
1.1.1.2
Intercept Routing
Description
Redirects incoming outside (CO) line calls via the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) or Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) feature to a preprogrammed destination when the original destination does not, or cannot, answer the call. There are 2 types of Intercept Routing, described below. Type No Dial Description After hearing a dial tone (short beep) or a DISA outgoing message (OGM), if the caller does not dial anything or enters an unrecognised input, the call is redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations in the following priority: DISA IRNA to BVDay/Night/Lunch [438-440] Flexible RingingDay/Night/Lunch [408-410] If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed time period ( DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508], UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525]), the call is redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations in the following priority: DISA IRNA to BVDay/Night/Lunch [438-440] Flexible RingingDay/Night/Lunch [408-410]
Intercept RoutingNo Answer (IRNA)

1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
Feature Guide
15
1.1.2
Internal Call Features
Description
There are 2 types of internal calls, described below. Feature Intercom Call Doorphone Call Description A call from one extension to another. Details in 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call
A call made from a doorphone to its preprogrammed destination 1.15.1 for the current time service mode, assigned to the doorphone's Doorphone Call port ( 2.2.3 Time Service).
16
Feature Guide
1.1.3
1.1.3.1
Incoming Call Indication Features

Incoming Call Indication FeaturesOVERVIEW
Description
Extension telephones can indicate an incoming call in various ways, described below. Indication Type Ring/No Ring Feature Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection Ring Tone Pattern Selection Alternate ReceivingRing/ Voice Description Details in
Each extension can be programmed to 1.1.3.2 Outside ring or not ring when receiving an outside (CO) Line Ringing (CO) line call. Selection A telephone rings when receiving a call. 1.1.3.3 Ring A different ring tone pattern can be Tone Pattern assigned to each incoming call type. Selection Proprietary telephone (PT) users can choose how their telephones receive intercom calls, by selecting to hear ring tones or the caller's voice. 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call
Ring Tone
Voice-calling
LED (Light Emitting LED Indication Diode) Display (Caller Information)
The LED indicators on a PT can indicate 1.18.3 LED Indication the status of different lines using light patterns and colours.
1.18.4 Display Display Information A user's PT can show a variety of Information information on the display, such as the outside (CO) line number, the caller's name and number, the extension number and name of the calling extension after the call is forwarded, etc. Call Waiting When an extension user is in the middle 1.1.3.5 Call of a call, the user can be alerted to a new Waiting call by a call waiting tone.
Tone During a Conversation
Feature Guide
17
1.1.3.2
Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection
Description
An extension user can select whether the telephone will ring or not when receiving call(s) from assigned or all outside (CO) lines through personal programming.
Conditions
System programming determines which extension(s) will ring for incoming outside (CO) line calls in each time service mode ( Flexible RingingDay/Night/Lunch [408-410]). If an outside (CO) line call reaches a user's extension, but the extension is set to not ring, the CO button will flash. The outside (CO) line call can be answered by pressing the flashing CO button.

3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode
18
Feature Guide
1.1.3.3
Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Description
A different ring tone pattern can be assigned to each incoming call type, such as intercom calls ( Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115]), calls from each doorphone ( Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706]), and calls from each outside (CO) line ( CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]). Available ring tone patterns are as follows: [Ring Tone Patterns]
1s
Single
Double
Triple
S-Double (Doorphone only)
Conditions
The ring tone pattern for incoming calls (intercom calls and outside (CO) line calls) to a single line telephone (SLT) can be fixed to "Single" or "Double" for each extension through system programming ( SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629]). The length of the ring tone pattern depends on the preprogrammed length of the bell-on signal ( SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143]), combined with the ratio between the bell signals of the SLT ( SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142]). Depending on the type of SLT being used, the SLT may not ring properly, if the ring tone pattern of the SLT is set differently from that used by the telephone company.

1.1.3.2 Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
Feature Guide
19
1.1.3.4
Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand
Description
Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) is only available in New Zealand. The PBX can detect the following 4 ring tone patterns sent from the telephone company for each outside (CO) line. When the PBX detects one of the ring tone patterns, the call will be transferred to the preprogrammed destination(s) automatically according to system programming. In addition, the extension ring tone pattern for the detected call can be assigned through system programming as shown below. [Ring Tone Patterns Sent from the Telephone Company]
1s
Pattern 1 (Normal) Pattern 2 (Voice) Pattern 3 (Modem/Voice) Pattern 4 (Fax)
Pattern 1
Destination assigned in Flexible RingingDay/Night/Lunch [408410], or sent to the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) line or Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) group
Ring Tone Pattern assigned in CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]
DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension Assignment DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434] Day/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand (New Zealand only) only) DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension Assignment DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434] Day/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand (New Zealand only) only) FAX Connection [503] CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]
Conditions
To use this feature, "UCD", "DISA", or "Normal" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416]) and DRD must be enabled ( Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only)).

1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
20
Feature Guide
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
Feature Guide
21
1.1.3.5
Call Waiting
Description
A busy extension user can be alerted to a new call by Call Waiting. The busy extension user can then answer the second call either by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold. If Call Waiting is enabled, a call waiting tone will be sent to the user under the following conditions:
a) When an outside (CO) line call or a doorphone call is received, or b) When another extension executes the Busy Station Signalling (BSS) feature.
If disabled, a reorder tone will be sent to the extension that executed the BSS feature. Call Waiting from the Telephone Company Besides the Call Waiting feature provided by the PBX, you can also subscribe to your telephone company's Call Waiting service and receive call waiting tones through the telephone company's lines. This feature is available when an extension is in a conversation with an outside party, and a call is received from another outside party on the same outside (CO) line. The external call waiting tone will alert an extension user of the incoming outside (CO) line call that is waiting. The user can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold. If a call waiting tone is heard but the corresponding CO button does not flash, this tone is an external call waiting tone from the telephone company. For details, consult your telephone company.
Conditions
Data Line Security When an extension user activates Data Line Security, Call Waiting is turned off ( 1.10.5 Data Line Security). Call Waiting Tone A proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the preferred call waiting tone through personal programming (Call Waiting Tone Type Selection). Caller ID Information When an extension receives a call waiting tone, the caller's information will flash on the display for 5 seconds at 15-second intervals.

1.7.3 Call Waiting Tone 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer 1.4.4 Answering Call Waiting 1.7.3 Receiving Call Waiting 3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode
22
Feature Guide
1.2 Receiving Group Features
1.2
1.2.1
Receiving Group Features

Idle Extension Hunting
Description
If a called extension is busy, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the call to an idle member of the same extension group, if that group has been assigned as an idle extension hunting group through system programming ( Hunting Group Set [100]). Idle extensions are automatically searched for according to a preprogrammed hunting type ( Hunting Type [101]). This feature is also known as Station Hunting. Type Circular Hunting Description An idle extension is searched for in a circular fashion one time according to the numerical order of the jacks.
Incoming call
Extn.
Numerical order
Busy Extn.
Busy Extn.
Busy Extn.
Terminated Hunting
An idle extension is searched for in the numerical order of the jacks, until reaching the extension that is connected to the highest-numbered jack in the group.
Incoming call
Highestnumbered jack Extn. Busy Extn. Busy Extn. Busy Extn.
Numerical order
Conditions
Idle Extension Hunting applies to: Intercom calls and outside (CO) line calls directed to a single extension. An extension can belong to only one extension group ( Extension Group [600]). One hunting type can be programmed for each extension group. If all the searched extensions are busy, a busy tone will be heard. A user can leave an idle extension hunting group temporarily by logging out of the group, and rejoin the group by logging back in ( 1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out). FWD/DND Mode When searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group, any extension that has set FWD, DND, or Log-out will be skipped ( 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)). However, if the extension that receives the call first has set FWD or DND, Idle Extension Hunting will not function and the call will be forwarded to the preprogrammed destination (when FWD is set) or will not be received at all (when DND is set).
Feature Guide
23
Message Waiting A message waiting indication will not be sent to an idle extension hunting destination. The MESSAGE button light or Message/Ringer Lamp turns on at the original destination only ( Message Waiting).
1.17.1

2.2.2 Group
24
Feature Guide
1.2.2
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Description
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) distributes incoming calls to an idle member of the same extension group, if that group has been assigned as a UCD group through system programming ( UCD Group [520]). Available extensions are searched for in a circular fashion in numerical order. The UCD feature is particularly helpful when a certain extension typically receives more calls than other extensions. [Example of UCD Group] The numbers found in circles below indicate calls and the order in which they arrived.
Calls arrive at the UCD group.
Call Distribution Calls are distributed in the numerical order of the jacks.
Queuing When the destination extension is busy or is logged out, the call waits in the queue and a UCD OGM is sent to the caller.
3 Extn. A Extn. B Extn. C Extn. D
Extn. A receives the first call.
UCD starts searching from extn. B (Skips extn. A).
When the second call arrives at extn. B, the third call will be directed to extn. C.
Feature Guide
25
[Flowchart]
A UCD call from an outside party is received.
The call reaches the UCD group. Busy Rings (when an extension is available)
A
UCD OGM
B
(UCD Ring Time before Intercept expires)
Music on Hold is sent to the caller.
The call is established. Rings (when an extension is available) Goes to B
The call is not answered.
Busy Did the UCD Busy Waiting Time expire? Is Intercept Routing employed? Yes No No Yes
C
The call is disconnected. The call is directed to another extension. (UCD Ring Time after Intercept expires) The call is established. The call is not answered.
Goes to A
What is the UCD Busy Mode ? Disconnect Disconnect-OGM Intercept-DISA
Intercept-Normal
A UCD OGM is sent to the caller.
Goes to C
The call is disconnected.
A DISA OGM is sent to the caller.
Goes to DISA
UCD Busy Mode

When all extensions in a UCD group are busy, a call will wait for a preprogrammed length of time ( UCD Busy Waiting Time [521]). If this timer expires, the PBX will handle the call in one of the following ways according to system programming ( UCD Busy Mode [523]):
a) Disconnect: The call is disconnected immediately. b) Disconnect-OGM: The call is disconnected after a UCD outgoing message (OGM) plays (e.g.,
"We are still handling other calls. Please call back later.").
c) Intercept-Normal: The call is directed to preprogrammed destinations (

Night/Lunch [408-410]).
Flexible RingingDay/
d) Intercept-DISA: The call is directed to the DISA feature (
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)) and the caller hears a DISA OGM (e.g., "Thank you for calling Company A. Press 1 to speak to Sales. Press 2 to speak to Support.").
26
Feature Guide
UCD Intercept Mode

When extensions in a UCD group are available but do not answer an outside (CO) line call within a preprogrammed length of time ( UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525]), the PBX will handle the call in one of the following ways according to system programming ( UCD Intercept Mode [524]):
a) Disconnect: The call is disconnected. If a UCD OGM is not played, the call will not be
disconnected until the caller goes on-hook.
b) Intercept: The call is directed to preprogrammed destinations (
Flexible RingingDay/Night/ Lunch [408-410]). The extensions that receive the redirected call ring for a preprogrammed time period ( UCD Ring Time after Intercept [526]). When the timer expires, the call is disconnected. If a UCD OGM is not played, the call will not be disconnected until the caller goes on-hook.
Conditions
To use this feature, "UCD" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416]). UCD OGM It is possible to select the UCD OGM sent to the caller when a call arrives at a UCD group and all extensions in the group are busy ( UCD Waiting Message [527]). The Log-in or Log-out status can be set for each extension ( 1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out). The last member of a group cannot log out. FWD/DND Mode When searching for an available extension, any extension that has set FWDAll Calls, FWDBusy/ No Answer, or DND will be skipped ( 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)). UCD Busy Waiting Time It is possible to assign the length of time ( UCD Busy Waiting Time [521]) the PBX holds an incoming outside (CO) line call via the UCD feature when all extensions in the UCD group are busy, and to assign the interval time between the repeated UCD OGMs ( UCD OGM Message Interval Time [522]). Cyclic Tone Detection It is possible to select the number of times a cyclic tone must be detected while the UCD OGM is sent ( Cyclic Tone Detection [513]). Cyclic Tone Detection can be used to disconnect an outside (CO) line call via UCD.

1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing 1.12.4 Music on Hold 2.2.2 Group
Feature Guide
27
1.2.3
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring
Description
A Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ring group is a specific extension group that receives DISA calls directed to the group. All extensions in the DISA ring group assigned as an Automated Attendant (AA) destination ( DISA Built-in AA [501]) ring simultaneously. Delayed Ringing Each extension can be programmed for Delayed Ringing ( Delayed RingingDay/Night/Lunch [411413]), which allows extensions to be alerted to calls by flashing buttons only. Received calls can be answered even if they are not ringing.
Extn. A
Extn. B
Extn. C
Extn. D
Immediately ring simultaneously.
Delayed Ringing: Rings after a specified time delay.
Conditions
To use this feature, "DISA" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416]), and DISA AA service must be assigned as the destination of incoming outside (CO) line calls via the DISA feature ( DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500]). The Log-in or Log-out status can be set for each extension ( 1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out). The last member of a group cannot log out.

1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 2.2.2 Group
28
Feature Guide
1.2.4
Log-in/Log-out
Description
Members of an idle extension hunting group, Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ring group, or Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) group can join (Log-in) or leave (Log-out) groups manually. Group members can log in at the beginning of a work shift when they are ready to answer calls, and log out at the end of the work shift.
Conditions
The last member of a group cannot log out. While logged out from a group, a member extension will not receive calls to that group via the DISA, UCD, or Idle Extension Hunting features. Log-in/Log-out Button A flexible CO button can be customised as a Log-in/Log-out button. It shows the current status as follows: Light Pattern Red on Off Logged out Logged in Status

1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring 1.18.2 Flexible Buttons

1.5.4 Leaving a Group (Log-in/Log-out)
Feature Guide
29
1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.1.1
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features

Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)OVERVIEW
Description
When an extension user cannot answer calls (is on a call, out of the office, etc.), it is possible to forward or refuse calls directed to that extension using the following features:
1. Call Forwarding (FWD) 2. Do Not Disturb (DND) 1. FWD

Extension users can forward their incoming calls to preset destinations ( (FWD)). 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding
2. DND
An extension user can send a DND tone to let the caller know that he or she is not available ( Do Not Disturb (DND)). 1.3.1.3
Conditions
FWD/DND Button If a proprietary telephone (PT) does not have an FWD/DND button, a flexible CO button can be customised as an FWD/DND button. [Button Status] The FWD/DND button shows the current status as follows: Light Pattern Red on Slow red flashing Off DND on FWD on FWD/DND off Status
Setting a new FWD mode, such as All Calls or Busy/No Answer, or the DND feature, clears the status of the previous FWD mode or DND feature.

1.18.1 Fixed Buttons 1.18.2 Flexible Buttons
30
Feature Guide
1.3.1.2
Call Forwarding (FWD)
Description
Extension users can forward their calls to preset destinations. There are 4 Call Forwarding (FWD) modes, described below. Mode All Calls Busy/No Answer To Outside (CO) Line Description All calls are forwarded to another extension. Calls are forwarded when the extension user's line is busy, or when the user does not answer within a preprogrammed time period. All calls are forwarded to an outside party, provided this feature is enabled for each extension through system programming ( Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]). When an extension user fails to set this feature before leaving his or her desk, this feature can be set from the destination extension.
Forwarded to: Extension Incoming Intercom Calls/ Outside (CO) Line Calls 1. Another Extension 2. Outside Party 3. VPS 4. BV
Follow Me
[Available Destinations] Destination Extension (proprietary telephone [PT]/single line telephone [SLT]) Automatic Line Access no. + Phone no. Only available when FWD to Outside (CO) Line is enabled for the extension through system programming ( Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]). Only available when FWD to Outside (CO) Line is enabled for the extension through system programming ( Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]). Only available when the BV feature is enabled for the extension through system programming ( BV for Extension [622]). Availability
Outside (CO) Line Group Access no. + Outside (CO) Line Group no. + Phone no. Voice Processing System (VPS) Built-in Voice Message (BV) feature no.
Conditions
[General]
This feature does not apply to calls from Hold Recall and Camp-on Recall. The types of calls that are forwarded by this feature are:
Feature Guide 31
Call Type Outside (CO) line calls Intercom calls Normal except FWD to Outside (CO) Line, Direct In Line (DIL), Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Extension, Transfer
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) When searching for an available extension within a UCD group, any extension that has set FWD will be skipped. However, if the last extension that can receive a call has set FWD, the call will be forwarded to that extension's call forwarding destination. The last member of a UCD group cannot log out. When a call is forwarded, the corresponding message waiting indication is not forwarded. The MESSAGE button light or Message/Ringer Lamp turns on only at the originally called extension ( 1.17.1 Message Waiting). It is programmable whether the calls received on outside (CO) lines programmed as "Normal" ( CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416]) are forwarded for each extension or not ( Call Forwarding Selection [963]). If FWD is enabled for an extension whose FWD destination is a VPS or Telephone Answering Machine (TAM) and the extension has been assigned to ring with other extensions, the VPS or TAM may answer the call before other extensions can answer it. To prevent this, disable FWD. A call can only be automatically forwarded one time. In the example below, extension A's calls are being forwarded to extension B. If extension B tries to set FWD to extension C, the extension B user hears a reorder tone and the setting is denied. If extension B has already set FWD to extension C, and extension A tries to set FWD to extension B, the setting is also denied.
A A
The destination of an extension's forwarded calls can call or transfer calls to the original extension.
Incoming call
FWDAll Calls
Call or transfer a call
Original
FWD destination
[Busy/No Answer]
No Answer Time The length of time before calls are forwarded is programmable for each extension ( Start Time [202]). Call Forwarding
[To Outside (CO) Line]

FWD to Outside (CO) Line System programming determines the extensions that can forward all intercom calls and certain outside (CO) line calls to an outside party ( Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]). These outside (CO) line calls must arrive on outside (CO) lines whose programming ( CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416]) is one of the following:
a) DIL
32
Feature Guide
b) DISA (only when the call is directly sent to an extension, not intercepted) c) UCD (when only one member belongs to the group)
Outside (CO) Line Call Duration If a call between 2 outside parties is established, the call duration will be restricted by a system timer ( CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). Both parties will hear a warning tone 15 seconds before the timer expires. When the timer expires, the call is disconnected ( 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation). If a CPC (Calling Party Control) signal or reverse signal is received from an outside (CO) line, the corresponding call between 2 outside parties will be disconnected.

1.5.1 Forwarding Your Calls (Call Forwarding [FWD]) 1.5.5 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Voice Message [BV]) 1.8.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
Feature Guide
33
1.3.1.3
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Description
Extension users can use this feature to prevent calls from ringing at their extension. The calling extension will hear a Do Not Disturb (DND) tone.
Conditions
DND Override An extension in DND mode can be called by extensions that are allowed to override DND through system programming ( DND Override [609]). This feature does not apply to calls from Hold Recall and Timed Reminder. Calls from outside (CO) lines programmed as "Normal" or "DIL" ( CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416]) can be received at a user's extension, but the telephone will not ring. The corresponding CO button will flash when an outside (CO) line call is received, and the user can answer the call by pressing this button.

1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer 1.7.2 Refusing Incoming Calls (Do Not Disturb [DND])
34
Feature Guide
1.4 Answering Features
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.1.1
Answering Features
Answering Features
Answering FeaturesOVERVIEW
Description
An extension user can answer incoming calls using the following methods: Called Extension A user's own extension (proprietary telephone [PT]) Feature Line Preference Incoming Direct One-touch Answering Hands-free Answerback Receiving Calls A user's own extension (single line telephone [SLT]) Another extension Call Pickup Description Details in
A user can select the line seized when going 1.4.1.2 Line off-hook. Preference Incoming A user can answer an incoming call simply by pressing the flashing CO or INTERCOM button. A user can answer calls automatically and establish a hands-free conversation. A user can answer an incoming call simply by going off-hook. 1.4.1.4 Handsfree Answerback
1.4.1.3 Call A user can pick up a call to a specific extension, a call within the user's extension Pickup group, or a call received by a Telephone Answering Machine (TAM) extension.
Feature Guide
35
1.4.1.2
Line PreferenceIncoming
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following 3 line preferences. Each of these line preferences can be selected by each extension through personal programming (Line PreferenceIncoming). Type No Line Prime Line Ringing Line (default) Description A user can select a line by pressing the desired Outside (CO) Line Access button to answer an incoming call after going off-hook. A user can answer a call arriving at a flexible CO button (assigned as the "Prime Line") simply by going off-hook. A user can answer a call ringing at one's own telephone simply by going off-hook.
Conditions
Ringing methods can be selected from among immediate, delayed, no ringing, or no incoming calls (disable) through system programming ( Flexible RingingDay/Night/Lunch [408-410], Delayed RingingDay/Night/Lunch [411-413]). A single line telephone (SLT) user can select "Ringing Line" mode only. A flexible CO button should be assigned as an Outside (CO) Line Access button (Single-CO [S-CO], Group-CO [G-CO] or Other-CO [O-CO]) before selecting a line preference. Setting a new line preference clears the previous line preference. In "Prime Line" mode, if a PT user receives an incoming call on a line other than the "Prime Line", the user must go off-hook and then press the corresponding flashing CO button to answer the call.

36
Feature Guide
1.4.1.3
Call Pickup
Description
An extension user can answer a call ringing at another extension by entering the appropriate feature numbers. The following types of Call Pickup are available: Type Directed Call Pickup Group Call Pickup Call Retrieving from a Telephone Answering Machine (TAM) Description A call to a specific extension is answered. A call to an extension in the same extension group ( [600]) is answered. A call received by a preprogrammed TAM extension ( [611]) is answered. Extension Group TAM Extension
Call Pickup Deny An extension user can prevent other extensions from picking up calls ringing at his or her own extension. If this feature is enabled, other users will hear a reorder tone when trying to pick up calls.
Conditions
[Directed/Group Call Pickup]
Call Pickup applies to: Intercom calls (except calls from Hold Recall and Camp-on Recall), outside (CO) line calls, and doorphone calls (even when the extension is not assigned as a destination for doorphone calls.) An extension user will hear a confirmation tone when he or she picks up the call with the Directed Call Pickup or Group Call Pickup feature. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming ( Call Pickup Tone [117]).
[Group Call Pickup]

By setting system programming ( Pickup Group [127]) in advance, an extension user can pick up a call to an extension in the same extension group simply by going off-hook even when his or her extension is not ringing.

1.3.3 Answering a Call Ringing at Another Telephone (Call Pickup)
Feature Guide
37
1.4.1.4
Hands-free Answerback
Description
A user with a speakerphone-equipped proprietary telephone (PT) can answer intercom calls automatically without lifting the handset. When a call is received at an extension that is in Hands-free Answerback mode, the caller hears a confirmation tone and the called extension hears a beep tone. Then the conversation is automatically established.
Conditions
Hands-free Answerback applies to: Intercom calls (not including outside (CO) line calls or doorphone calls) When an outside (CO) line call is transferred to an extension, this feature is overridden and a ring tone is heard.

1.5.1.1 Intercom Call

1.3.2 Answering Hands-free (Hands-free Answerback)
38
Feature Guide
1.5 Making Call Features
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.1.1
Making Call Features

Intercom Call Features
Intercom Call
Description
An extension user can call another extension user.
Conditions
Extension Number/Name Assignment Extension numbers ( Extension Number [009]) and names ( Extension Name [604], Extension Name in Cyrillic [616]) can be assigned to all extensions. During intercom calls, the number and name of the other extension are shown on the displays of proprietary telephones (PTs). DSS Button It is possible to call another extension simply by pressing the corresponding Direct Station Selection (DSS) button ( DSS Off-hook Mode [126]). A flexible CO/DSS/MESSAGE button can be customised as a DSS button. The DSS buttons on a DSS Console can also be used. Alternate ReceivingRing/Voice A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice, through personal programming (Alternate ReceivingRing/Voice). If a user selects voice-calling, the calling party can talk to the user immediately after hearing a confirmation tone. Alternate CallingRing/Voice A caller can change the called party's preset call receiving method (ring tone or voice). By doing so, ring-calling is switched to voice-calling, or vice versa, at the called party. This setting is active for the current call only, after which it reverts to the called party's previous setting. The extension ring tone pattern for incoming intercom calls can be selected through system programming ( Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115]). The ringback tone pattern for outgoing intercom calls and for incoming outside (CO) line calls can also be selected through system programming ( Ringback Tone Pattern [128]). Tone after Dialling After dialling an extension number, a user will hear one of the following: Type Ringback Tone Confirmation Tone Busy Tone DND Tone Description Indicates the call is being received at the called party's extension. Indicates the called party has set voice-calling. Indicates the called party's extension is busy. Indicates the called party has set Do Not Disturb (DND).

1.18.2 Flexible Buttons 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
Feature Guide
39

1.2.1 Basic Calling 1.2.5 Switching the Calling Method (Alternate CallingRing/Voice) 3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode
40
Feature Guide
1.5.2
1.5.2.1
Outside (CO) Line Call Features

Outside (CO) Line Call FeaturesOVERVIEW
Description
An extension user can use the following features when making an outside (CO) line call: Feature Emergency Call Description Details in
A user can dial preprogrammed emergency 1.5.2.2 Emergency numbers regardless of the restrictions imposed on Call the extension. A user can enter an account code to identify 1.5.2.3 Account outgoing calls for accounting and billing purposes. Code Entry A user can temporarily switch from Pulse mode to 1.5.2.4 Dial Type DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) mode if Selection necessary. A dialling pause can be manually inserted by pressing the PAUSE button, or can be automatically inserted after a user-dialled code, such as a Host PBX Access code or Automatic Pause Insertion code. The length of the pause can be specified through system programming. 1.5.2.6 Pause Insertion 1.5.2.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
Account Code Entry Pulse to Tone Conversion
Pause Insertion
Feature Guide
41
1.5.2.2
Emergency Call
Description
An extension user can dial preprogrammed emergency numbers ( Emergency Number [309]) after seizing an outside (CO) line regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension.
Conditions
If the PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX, an extension user must dial the Host PBX Access code after the Outside (CO) Line Access number. This feature will function even when: In Account CodeVerify-All/Verify-Toll/Forced mode ( 1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry) Restricted by the current class of service (COS) ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)) In Extension Lock ( 1.8.3 Extension Lock)
42
Feature Guide
1.5.2.3
Account Code Entry
Description
An account code is used to identify outgoing outside (CO) line calls for accounting and billing purposes. Account codes are appended to SMDR call records ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)), and have several uses. For example, a firm can use an account code for each client to determine which calls were made for which client, and can submit a bill to the client according to the client's account code as shown on the SMDR call record. There are 4 methods of entering account codes, explained below. One method is assigned to each extension through system programming ( Account Code Mode [605]). Mode Option Description An extension user can (but is not required to) enter a 4-digit account code during a conversation or within 30 seconds after a conversation ends when a record is needed. An extension user must always enter a 4-digit account code within 5 seconds after seizing an outside (CO) line. This method ensures that extension users will not forget to enter account codes. An extension user must always enter a preprogrammed account code ( Account Code [310]) within 5 seconds after seizing an outside (CO) line. If the entered code does not match any preprogrammed code, the user will hear a reorder tone. An extension user can enter a preprogrammed account code ( Account Code [310]) within 5 seconds after seizing an outside (CO) line to override TRS ( 1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code). Classes of service (COSs) 3 through 5 will be changed temporarily to COS 2. COSs 1 and 2 will not be affected. If the entered account code is also registered as an extension password, the extension password feature will be given priority. The COS of the corresponding extension will be applied.
Forced
Verify-All
Verify-Toll
Conditions
An account code can be stored in Memory Dialling (One-touch Dialling, Hot Line, Speed Dialling System/Personal, Call Forwarding (FWD) to Outside (CO) Line, etc.). In this case, the Account Code feature number and specified account code must be entered after the Outside (CO) Line Access number. An extension user does not need to enter an account code for incoming outside (CO) line calls. Even in Forced/Verify-All/Verify-Toll mode, emergency calls can be made without an account code ( 1.5.2.2 Emergency Call).

1.2.1 Basic Calling
Feature Guide
43
1.5.2.4
Dial Type Selection
Description
The dialling mode can be selected for each outside (CO) line through system programming ( Dial Mode [401]) regardless of the originating extension (dependent on the contract with the telephone company). Mode DTMF (Dual Tone MultiFrequency) Pulse (Rotary) Call Blocking Description Numbers dialled by an extension user are transmitted to the outside (CO) line using tones. If this PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX, select this mode as necessary. Numbers dialled by an extension user are transmitted to the outside (CO) line using pulses. If your telephone company or a host PBX can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals but the contract specifies Pulse lines, select this mode. When dialling with a touch-tone telephone, only Pulse signals will be sent to the telephone company.
Conditions
Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type The dialling mode of connected outside (CO) lines is automatically assigned after restarting the PBX using the System Clear Switch or through system programming ( System Data Clear [999]). No system programming in Dial Mode [401] and Pulse Speed [402] is required unless the dialling mode of the connected outside (CO) lines is Call Blocking. If your telephone company can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals, the PBX selects an outside (CO) line type according to the following priority: Pulse (Low) Pulse (High) DTMF Pulse to Tone Conversion It is possible for an extension user to temporarily switch from Pulse mode to DTMF mode in order to access special services such as computer-accessed long-distance calling or voice mail services. To switch to DTMF mode, wait for a preprogrammed time period after the outside (CO) line is connected, or press the " #" key. This feature functions only on outside (CO) lines set to "Pulse" or "Call Block" mode ( Dial Mode [401]). DTMF mode cannot be changed to Pulse mode. The pulse rate for outside (CO) lines that have been set to "Pulse" or "Call Block" mode ( Pulse Speed [402]) should be selected depending on your telephone company. There are 2 pulse rates: Low (10 pps) and High (20 pps). It is possible to assign the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to outside (CO) lines that have been set to "DTMF" mode ( DTMF Time [210]). It is programmable whether DTMF dialling is sent to the telephone company when an extension user redials after changing from Pulse mode to DTMF mode by pressing the " #" key ( Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion [119]).

1.4.9 Changing the Dialling Mode (Pulse to Tone Conversion)
44
Feature Guide
1.5.2.5
Reverse Circuit
Description
The PBX can detect the reverse signal sent from the telephone company when an extension user tries to make an outside (CO) line call. This detects the start (the called party goes off-hook) and end (the called party goes on-hook) of an outgoing outside (CO) line call. The duration of the call can be verified with SMDR using this feature ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)). This feature is also known as Polarity Reverse Detection.
Conditions
If Reverse Signal Detection is enabled for an outside (CO) line ( Polarity Reverse Detection [424]), the PBX will automatically start the timer ( Call Duration Counter Start [204]) immediately after the outside party answers the call.
Feature Guide
45
1.5.2.6
Pause Insertion
Description
A dialling pause of a preprogrammed length can be inserted manually or automatically when dialling. Manual Pause Insertion: A pause can be manually inserted by pressing the PAUSE button. Automatic Pause Insertion: A pause will be automatically inserted after the user dials any one of the following numbers:
a) Outside (CO) Line Access number b) Automatic Pause Insertion code c) Host PBX Access code ( 1.5.2.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone
Company from a Host PBX))
Conditions
The pause length is programmable for each outside (CO) line ( Pause Time [417]). When a dialled telephone number matches one of the Automatic Pause Insertion codes assigned through system programming ( Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311]), a pause will be automatically inserted after the code. This is particularly convenient if a second dial tone is sent from your telephone company.
46
Feature Guide
1.5.2.7
Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
Description
This PBX can be installed behind an existing host PBX. This is performed by connecting extension jacks of the host PBX to outside (CO) line ports of this PBX. A Host PBX Access code, assigned through system programming ( Host PBX Access Code [403]), is required to access the telephone company from the host PBX. The Outside (CO) Line Access number (9/0*1, or 81 through 88) of the host PBX should be stored as a Host PBX Access code for each outside (CO) line of this PBX. A pause of a preprogrammed length ( Pause Time [417]) will be automatically inserted after the user-dialled Host PBX Access code. [Example]
Telephone Company
Host PBX Access Code for PBX, or Automatic Line Access No. for Host PBX: 0
Host PBX
Outside Party
(01-23-4567)
Automatic Line Access No.: 9
Extn. 101 Outside (CO) line 1 PBX
Extn. 102
Dials "0-01-23-4567".
Host PBX Access Code Telephone No.
Dials "9-0-01-23-4567".
Automatic Line Access No. Telephone No.
Dials "9-101".
Automatic Line Access No. Extn. No. of the Host PBX
Host PBX Access Code
Note In this example, "0" should be assigned as the Host PBX Access code for outside (CO) line 1 of this PBX.
*1
For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9.
Feature Guide
47
Conditions
Access to the host PBX during a conversation is also possible ( 1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA)). TRS TRS checks only the dialled telephone number, excluding the Host PBX Access code, when accessing the telephone company through the host PBX ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)). SMDR The Host PBX Access code can be logged by SMDR along with the dialled number when accessing the telephone company through the host PBX ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)).
48
Feature Guide
1.5.3
1.5.3.1
Seizing a Line Features

Seizing a Line FeaturesOVERVIEW
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the line that is seized in order to make a call, using one of the following features: Feature Line PreferenceOutgoing Description Details in
A user can select the line to be seized when going off- 1.5.3.2 Line hook. Preference Outgoing A user can select the Outside (CO) Line Access method used when making outside (CO) line calls. 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
Outside (CO) Line Access
Feature Guide
49
1.5.3.2
Line PreferenceOutgoing
Description
Through personal programming, a proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the preferred method of seizing a line (Line PreferenceOutgoing) to be used each time the user goes off-hook. Method Idle Line Description When a user goes off-hook, an idle outside (CO) line is selected automatically from among the assigned outside (CO) lines ( Automatic Designated Line Access [419]). When a user goes off-hook, no line is selected. In order to make a call, the user must select the desired line manually. When a user goes off-hook, the preset line is selected automatically.
No Line Prime Line
Conditions
A flexible CO button should be assigned as an Outside (CO) Line Access button (Single-CO [S-CO], Group-CO [G-CO], or Other-CO [O-CO]) before selecting a line preference. Setting a new line preference clears the previous line preference. Line Preference Override A user can override the preset line preference temporarily by pressing the desired Outside (CO) Line Access button before going off-hook. System programming determines the extension users that can make outside (CO) line calls in each time service mode ( Flexible Outward DiallingDay/Night/Lunch [405-407]). It is possible to specify which outside (CO) lines are connected to the PBX ( CO Line Connection [400]). This prevents extension users from trying to select or making calls using outside (CO) lines that are not connected.

50
Feature Guide
1.5.3.3
Outside (CO) Line Access
Description
There are 3 methods of accessing an outside (CO) line. Method Automatic Line Access (Local Access) Description Selects an idle outside (CO) line automatically from the assigned outside (CO) lines ( Automatic Designated Line Access [419]). If Idle Line Preference ( 1.5.3.2 Line PreferenceOutgoing) is set on the extension through personal programming, the user can access an idle line simply by going off-hook. Operation Dial the Automatic Line Access number (9/0)* ( Automatic Line Access [121]). Note
* For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9.
Outside (CO) Line Group Access
Selects an idle outside (CO) line from Dial the Outside (CO) Line Group the corresponding outside (CO) line Access number and an outside group. (CO) line group number, or press a Group-CO (G-CO) button. Selects the desired outside (CO) line Press the Single-CO (S-CO) directly. button.
S-CO Line Access
Line Access Using the Other-CO (O-CO) Button To select an idle outside (CO) line from among the outside (CO) lines that are not assigned to S-CO or GCO buttons, the proprietary telephone (PT) user can press the O-CO button.
Conditions
The PBX waits for a preprogrammed length of time ( Dialling Start Time [206]) after seizing an outside (CO) line before dialling. Button Assignment A flexible CO button can be customised as an S-CO, G-CO, or O-CO button as follows: Type Single-CO (S-CO) Group-CO (G-CO) Other-CO (O-CO) Assignable parameter A specified outside (CO) line is assigned (Default: CO 1CO 8). An outside (CO) line group is assigned ( [404]). CO Line Group Number
Outside (CO) lines that are not assigned to S-CO or G-CO buttons are assigned.
The same outside (CO) line group can be assigned to more than one G-CO button on the same PT. The same outside (CO) line can be assigned to an S-CO button and a G-CO button. Dialling the Outside (CO) Line Access number selects a CO button according to the following priority: S-CO G-CO O-CO Once a flexible CO button is assigned as an Outside (CO) Line Access button, it indicates line status with a variety of light patterns ( 1.18.3 LED Indication). Direct Outside (CO) Line Access If a PT user is on-hook when pressing an idle CO button, the PT automatically enables hands-free
Feature Guide
51
operation mode. The user can dial without lifting the handset or pressing the SP-PHONE or MONITOR button. Outside (CO) Line Hunting Order for Automatic Line Access The outside (CO) line hunting sequence (from highest-numbered outside (CO) line, or in rotation) for Automatic Line Access can be determined through system programming ( Automatic Rotation for CO Line Access [122]). System programming determines the extension users that can make outside (CO) line calls in each time service mode ( Flexible Outward DiallingDay/Night/Lunch [405-407]). It is possible to specify which outside (CO) lines are connected to the PBX ( CO Line Connection [400]). This prevents extension users from trying to select or making calls using outside (CO) lines that are not connected.

1.18.2 Flexible Buttons

1.2.1 Basic Calling
52
Feature Guide
1.6 Memory Dialling Features
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.1.1
Memory Dialling Features

Memory Dialling Features
Memory Dialling FeaturesOVERVIEW
Description
An extension user can store frequently dialled numbers in the PBX. A stored number can be dialled by a simple operation.
1. Features
Feature One-touch Dialling Storage Method Personal Programming, System Programming Details in 1.6.1.2 Onetouch Dialling 1.6.1.3 KXT7710 One-touch Dialling 1.6.1.4 Redial
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling System Programming
Redial
Last Number The last or most recently dialled number is automatically stored. Saved Number While in a conversation with an outside party or while hearing a busy tone, the current telephone number can be manually stored and redialled afterwards.
Speed Dialling Quick Dialling Hot Line
Personal System
Personal Programming with the Feature Number 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling System Programming Personal/System System Programming 1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling
Personal Programming with the Feature Number 1.6.1.7 Hot Line Caller ID information is automatically stored. 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log
Incoming Call Log
2. Valid Input
Input 09/ /# PAUSE (Pause) Displayed while Entering 09/ /# P Description Store digits, , and # by pressing the corresponding buttons. Store a dialling pause by pressing the PAUSE button ( 1.5.2.6 Pause Insertion).
Feature Guide
53
Input FLASH/RECALL (Hooking)*1 F
Displayed while Entering
Description Store an EFA signal (EFA mode) by pressing the FLASH/RECALL button at the beginning of the number ( 1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA)). Hide all or part of the System Speed Dialling number or One-touch Dialling number from the display by pressing the INTERCOM button at the beginning and at the end of the number to be hidden (Secret Dialling). It is programmable whether the hidden part will be shown on SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)). Store a hyphen by pressing the CONF button.
INTERCOM (Secret)*1
[/]
CONF (Hyphen)*2
*1 *2
Available only when in system/personal programming mode Available only when in system programming mode
[Example of Secret Dialling] When storing the number "91234567890", to hide the telephone number "1234567890",
Enter 9 INTERCOM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 INTERCOM .
Notes
The characters for secret code, "[" and "]" (entered by pressing the INTERCOM button), are counted as one digit each. It is not possible to hide the Outside (CO) Line Access number (9/0*, or 81 through 88) by pressing the INTERCOM button before dialling it. * For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9.
Conditions
Outside (CO) Line Access by Memory Dialling (One-touch Dialling/System Speed Dialling) A specific Outside (CO) Line Access number can be stored along with the telephone number in Memory Dialling. However, if Memory Dialling is performed after selecting an outside (CO) line, the stored Outside (CO) Line Access number is ignored and the telephone number is sent using the selected outside (CO) line.
54
Feature Guide
1.6.1.2
One-touch Dialling
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can make a call or access a feature with a one-touch operation. This is possible by storing the number (up to 24 digits), such as an extension number, telephone number, account code, or feature number, in a One-touch Dialling button.
Conditions
One-touch Dialling Button A flexible CO/Direct Station Selection (DSS)/Programmable Feature (PF)/MESSAGE button can be customised as a One-touch Dialling button. A number consisting of 25 digits or more can be stored by dividing it and storing it in 2 One-touch Dialling buttons. Personal Speed Dialling numbers (0 through 9) correspond to the numbers (F1 through F10) of the PF buttons assigned as One-touch Dialling numbers. Assigning a One-touch Dialling number to PF button "F1" will override Personal Speed Dialling number "0", and vice versa.


1.2.2 Easy Dialling
Feature Guide
55
1.6.1.3
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling
Description
The MESSAGE button and each of the 8 One-touch buttons on the KX-T7710 single line telephone (SLT) can be customised to dial an extension number, telephone number, or feature number (up to 24 digits) when the user presses that button. To allow easy configuration of multiple extensions, every KX-T7710 connected to the PBX can be customised with the same settings at once, through system programming ( KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling [013]). This is useful for hotel room extensions or similar applications. The KX-T7710 has 2 modes, "NORMAL" mode and "PBX" mode, selected by a switch on the telephone. This feature is available only when the KX-T7710 is in "PBX" mode. [Programming Example: KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling] Location No. 1 2 3 (Cont.) : : 9 Button One-touch Dial 01 One-touch Dial 02 One-touch Dial 03 : : MESSAGE Desired Number 100 (Front Desk) 76XX (Wake-up Call) 102 (Restaurant) : : 784#
Conditions
System programming determines the SLTs that can receive the message waiting notifications left by another extension ( SLT Message Waiting [619]). If a user goes off-hook with an SLT that has messages waiting, a special dial tone (dial tone 3) will be heard. The user can call a caller back or listen to the message simply by pressing the MESSAGE button because the button includes the default value of Message Waiting Answer feature number. Any feature number can be stored in a One-touch button. However, the feature numbers for Personal Speed Dialling, System Speed Dialling, and Quick Dialling do not function. KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling is available to users while hearing a dial tone. KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling is not available to users when the KX-T7710 is connected in parallel with a proprietary telephone (PT). Please refer to the Quick Reference Guide of the KX-T7710 for additional information.


1.2.2 Easy Dialling
56
Feature Guide
1.6.1.4
Redial
Description
There are 2 types of Redial, described below. Type Last Number Redial Saved Number Redial Description Every extension automatically saves the last external telephone number dialled, allowing the same number to be easily redialled. A proprietary telephone (PT) user can save a telephone number while in a conversation with an outside party or while hearing a busy tone, and then easily redial the number later. The saved number is kept until a new number is stored.
Automatic Redial If Last Number Redial or Saved Number Redial is performed in hands-free mode and the called party is busy, the number will be automatically redialled a preprogrammed number of times ( Automatic Redial Repeat Count [113]) at a preprogrammed interval ( Automatic Redial Interval [114]). This feature is only available on PT models that have an SP-PHONE or MONITOR button.
Conditions
[General]
Up to 64 digits plus the Outside (CO) Line Access number can be stored and redialled for each Redial type. Automatic Redial is cancelled if any other number is dialled, or if an incoming call is answered. Headset users cannot use the Automatic Redial feature.
[Last Number Redial]

The stored telephone number is replaced whenever a new number is dialled.
[Saved Number Redial]

Save Button A flexible CO button can be customised as a Save button.


1.2.3 Redialling
Feature Guide
57
1.6.1.5
Speed DiallingPersonal/System
Description
An extension user can use short numbers to frequently dialled numbers that are stored in the PBX, either in the extension's Personal Speed Dialling or in System Speed Dialling. Personal Speed Dialling is also known as Station Speed Dialling.
Conditions
[General]
Any number, such as a telephone number or feature number, can be stored in Personal Speed Dialling (up to 24 digits) and System Speed Dialling (up to 32 digits). This feature is not available on rotary single line telephones (SLTs).
[Personal Speed Dialling]

Personal Speed Dialling numbers (0 through 9) correspond to the numbers (F1 through F10) of the Programmable Feature (PF) buttons assigned as One-touch Dialling numbers. Assigning a One-touch Dialling number to PF button "F1" will override Personal Speed Dialling number "0", and vice versa.
[System Speed Dialling]

TRS for System Speed Dialling ( TRSSystem Speed Dialling Class [301]) Calls made using System Speed Dialling are restricted depending on the class of service (COS) of System Speed Dialling numbers and the COS assigned to each extension ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)). System Speed Dialling numbers ( System Speed Dialling Number [001]) and names ( System Speed Dialling Name [011]) can be assigned through system programming. The assigned name will be shown on the display of a proprietary telephone (PT) when an extension user makes calls using this feature. Caller's Name If the dialled number matches a number stored in the System Speed Dialling table with an assigned name, the assigned name will be shown on the display ( 1.16.1 Caller ID). System Speed Dialling, One-touch Dialling, and manual dialling can be used in combination.

1.2.2 Easy Dialling 3.3.2 System Programming
58
Feature Guide
1.6.1.6
Quick Dialling
Description
Using Quick Dialling, an extension user can make a call or access a feature easily. This is possible by storing the number (up to 10 digits), such as extension number, telephone number, or feature number, for Quick Dialling through system programming ( Second Feature Numbering Plan [012]). [Programming Example: Quick Dialling] Code No. 50 51 (Cont.) : : 59 In this example: Desired Number #34 #43 : : 912345678
a) The feature number for PagingExternal, "#34", is stored with the code number "50". Users can
make paging announcements by going off-hook and then dialling "50".
b) The feature number for PagingAnswer, "#43", is stored with the code number "51". Users can
answer paging announcements by going off-hook and then dialling "51".
c) A telephone number, "912345678", is stored with the code number "59". Users can call this outside
number by going off-hook and then dialling "59".
Conditions
This feature is available when "Plan 2" or "Plan 3" is selected in Extension Number [009] ( Feature Numbering). 2.3.4

1.2.2 Easy Dialling
Feature Guide
59
1.6.1.7
Hot Line
Description
A single line telephone (SLT) user can make an outgoing call to a previously stored telephone number (up to 32 digits) simply by going off-hook. If the Hot Line feature is set and the user goes off-hook, a special dial tone (dial tone 2) is generated for a preprogrammed time period ( Hot Line Waiting Time [203]), and then dialling starts. During this waiting time, the user can dial another party, overriding the Hot Line feature. This feature is also known as Pickup Dialling.
Conditions
This feature cannot be programmed on rotary SLTs. This feature will not function when the extension user goes off-hook to answer an incoming call or retrieve a call on hold.

1.2.2 Easy Dialling
60
Feature Guide
1.7 Busy Line/Busy Party Features
1.7
1.7.1
Busy Line/Busy Party Features

Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
Description
If the selected outside (CO) line is busy when a call is made, the caller can choose to be informed by a callback ring (Camp-on Recall) when the line becomes free. When the user answers the callback ring: For an intercom call: The called extension starts ringing without the user having to redial. For an outside (CO) line call: The line is seized.
Conditions
If the callback ring is not answered within 10 seconds (4 rings), the callback is cancelled. More than one extension user can set this feature to monitor the same destination extension or outside (CO) line at the same time.

1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer
Feature Guide
61
1.7.2
Executive Busy Override
Description
An extension user can interrupt an existing call to establish a 3-party conference call. Executive Busy Override Deny It is possible for extension users to prevent their calls from being interrupted by another extension user.
Conditions
System programming determines extension users who can use Executive Busy Override ( Executive Busy Override [608]). This feature will not function when the busy extension has set Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security ( 1.10.5 Data Line Security). When a 2-party conversation is changed to a 3-party conference call, a confirmation tone will be sent to all parties ( 1.13.1.2 Conference). It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming ( Conference Tone [105]).

1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer 1.7.4 Preventing Other People from Joining Your Conversation (Executive Busy Override Deny)
62
Feature Guide
1.7.3
Call Waiting Tone
Description
When an extension user attempts to call a busy extension (i.e., an extension that is ringing or having a conversation), a call waiting tone will be sent to the called extension to indicate another call is waiting.
Conditions
This feature functions only if the called extension has activated Call Waiting. If it is activated, the calling extension will hear a ringback tone. One of 2 call waiting tones can be selected through personal programming (Call Waiting Tone Type Selection).

1.1.3.5 Call Waiting 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

Feature Guide
63
1.8 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features
1.8
1.8.1
Toll Restriction (TRS) Features

Toll Restriction (TRS)
Description
Toll Restriction (TRS) can prohibit certain extension users from making unauthorised outside (CO) line calls. Every extension is assigned to one of 5 classes of service (COSs) for each time service mode ( TRSCOSDay/Night/Lunch [601-603]); COS 1 grants the highest level of authorisation, allowing all outside (CO) line calls to be made, and COS 5 grants the lowest level of authorisation. COSs 2 through 5 are used to restrict calls with a combination of preprogrammed Denied and Exception Code Tables, explained below. Denied Code Tables ( TRSCOS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305]) Denied Code Tables are preprogrammed lists containing the telephone numbers that are restricted. All outgoing outside (CO) line calls made by COS 2 through 5 users are compared to the applicable Denied Code Table(s), and when the leading number of a dialled telephone number (not including the Outside (CO) Line Access number) matches an entry found in an applicable table, the call is denied. Up to a total of 80 denied codes, each consisting of up to 11 digits, can be stored. Exception Code Tables ( TRSException Code [306]) Exception Code Tables are preprogrammed lists of leading digits or complete telephone numbers that are checked against every dialled number prohibited by a Denied Code Table. When a dialled number is prohibited by a Denied Code Table, it is compared to the applicable Exception Code Table(s). If the dialled number matches an entry found in an applicable Exception Code Table, the call is permitted. Up to 80 exception codes, each consisting of up to 11 digits, can be stored. The available number of codes depends on the COS assigned to each extension. Applicable tables by COS The Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables that apply to each COS are listed below. COS No. 1 Denied Code Tables No restriction. (Not Programmable) 20 denied codes programmed in [302]. (Table for Class 2) 40 denied codes programmed in [302] and [303]. (Tables for Classes 2 and 3) 60 denied codes programmed in [302] through [304]. (Tables for Classes 2 through 4) 80 denied codes programmed in [302] through [305]. (Tables for Classes 2 through 5) Exception Code Tables No restriction. (Not Programmable) 80 exception codes (code numbers 0180) programmed in [306]. (Tables for Classes 2 through 5) 60 exceptions codes (code numbers 0160) programmed in [306]. (Tables for Classes 3 through 5 ) 40 exception codes (code numbers 0140) programmed in [306]. (Tables for Classes 4 and 5) 20 exception codes (code numbers 0120) programmed in [306]. (Table for Class 5)
64
Feature Guide
COS 1 COS 2 COS 3 COS 4 COS 5 Class 2 restriction
All outside (CO) line calls permitted. Class 2 5 exceptions Class 3 5 exceptions Class 4 5 exceptions Class 5 exception
Calls are permitted
Class 2 3 restrictions Class 2 4 restrictions Class 2 5 restrictions

Calls are restricted
TRS for System Speed Dialling ( TRSSystem Speed Dialling Class [301]) Calls made using System Speed Dialling are restricted depending on the COS of System Speed Dialling numbers and the COS assigned to each extension. If, for example, the COS of System Speed Dialling numbers is assigned as "2", the PBX will allow System Speed Dialling calls for the extensions with COSs 1 and 2, but not allow System Speed Dialling calls for the extensions with COSs 3, 4, and 5 according to TRS as follows: System Speed Dialling Class COS No. 1 1 2 3 4 5 Permitted 2 3 4 5
Feature Guide
65
[Flowchart]
An extension user tries to make an outside (CO) line call.
Was the number dialled using System Speed Dialling? No Yes
Yes
Is the COS number higher than the System Speed Dialling Class? No or Equal
What is the COS number?
COS 1
COSs 25
Is the dialled number found in an applicable Denied Code Table? Yes
No
Is the dialled number found in an applicable Exception Code Table? No The call is denied. The user hears a reorder tone.
Yes
The call is permitted.
Conditions
WARNING The software contained in the TRS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service. Failure to upgrade the on-premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and users of the PBX from gaining access to the network and to these codes. KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA. Emergency numbers, such as the police or fire services, should be stored ( Emergency Number [309]) so that they are not barred by TRS. Host PBX Access Code/Carrier Exception Code TRS checks can be carried out on telephone numbers dialled using a Host PBX Access code (
66
Feature Guide
1.5.2.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)) or Carrier Exception code. Access Code is stored in the PBX Access Code Type Access Code is dialled Host PBX Access Code*1 TRS ignores the code and checks the remaining digits. TRS ignores the code and checks the remaining digits. Access Code is not dialled Access Code is not stored in the PBX
Number dialled is not an TRS checks the entire outside (CO) line call, so number. TRS does not check the number. TRS checks the entire number. TRS checks the entire number.
Carrier Exception Code*2
*1 *2
Host PBX Access Code [403] Carrier Exception Code [300]
The inter-digit timer ( Inter-digit Time [208]) applies until the TRS check is completed. When the timer expires, the outgoing outside (CO) line call is disconnected while dialling, if enabled through system programming ( No Dial Disconnection [211]). For a single line telephone (SLT), an outgoing outside (CO) line call will be released from the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) receiver when the inter-digit timer expires. The COS of extensions locked by the Extension Lock or Remote Extension Lock feature ( 1.8.3 Extension Lock) can be assigned ( TRSExtension Lock Class [312]) so that even a locked extension can make outside (CO) line calls. The higher COS number will take precedence. If, for example, COS 3 is assigned to an extension ( TRS-COSDay/Night/Lunch [601-603]) and the COS of locked extensions is assigned as "4", when the extension is locked, the PBX allows the extension user to make outside (CO) line calls using COS 4. The PBX can also be programmed to perform a TRS check for numbers that contain nondigits ( or #) ( TRS Check for * and # [125]). If TRS check is disabled, the PBX ignores any nondigits that are dialled when checking, which is useful in preventing some unauthorised calls.

1.6.1.5 Speed DiallingPersonal/System 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
Feature Guide
67
1.8.2
Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code
Description
An extension user can override TRS temporarily to make a toll call from a toll-restricted telephone ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)). The extension user can carry out this feature by entering the appropriate account code before dialling the telephone number ( Account Code [310]). [Flowchart]
TRS Override by Account Code is attempted.
Option/ Forced
VerifyAll What is the account code mode?
VerifyToll
Does the entered account code match an extension password? No
Yes
Does the entered account code match a stored account code? Yes No
No
Does the entered account code match a stored account code? Yes
Yes Is the COS number "1"?
No The call is established with COS 2. The call is established with the COS number of the corresponding extension. The call is denied. The user hears a reorder tone.
The COS number remains the same as that of the extension being used.
68
Feature Guide
Conditions
This feature functions only for extensions whose: Account code mode is set to "Verify-Toll" ( Account Code Mode [605]). Class of service (COS) number is set to 3 through 5. If the extension user does not enter an account code or enters an invalid account code, an ordinary TRS check is performed. System programming determines whether SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)) logs the 4-digit account code or the 2-digit index of the account code when an extension user makes a call using this feature ( SMDR Account Code [805]). It is also possible to override TRS at another extension using the Walking COS feature ( 1.8.4 Walking COS).

1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry
Feature Guide
69
1.8.3
Extension Lock
Description
Extension users can lock their telephones to prevent unauthorised use. This is useful for situations when extension users must leave their desks temporarily. Any 4-digit code can be used to lock and unlock an extension. This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout.
Conditions
Remote Extension Lock An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can remotely lock or unlock an extension using a Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console. This feature functions only if the operator or manager has set the extension password. When the operator or manager locks an extension remotely, the extension's user cannot unlock it. When a user locks an extension, the operator or manager extension can override the lock and unlock the extension. This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control. The class of service (COS) of extensions locked by the Extension Lock or Remote Extension Lock feature can be assigned ( TRSExtension Lock Class [312]) so that even a locked extension can make outside (CO) line calls. The higher COS number will take precedence. If, for example, COS 3 is assigned to an extension ( TRS-COSDay/Night/Lunch [601-603]) and the COS of locked extensions is assigned as "4", when the extension is locked, the PBX allows the extension user to make outside (CO) line calls using COS 4. Extension LockCANCEL ALL The operator or manager can cancel this feature for all extensions simultaneously. This feature also functions as Incoming Call Log Display Lock ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log). The Incoming Call Log for the common area can only be locked or unlocked by the operator and manager.

1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)

1.5.3 Preventing Other People from Using Your Telephone (Extension Lock) 2.1.1 Locking Other Extensions (Remote Extension Lock) 2.1.7 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode
70
Feature Guide
1.8.4
Walking COS
Description
Extension users can temporarily assign their own class of service (COS) to another extension, allowing them to make calls as if from their own telephones. This feature is useful when a manager or supervisor needs to borrow another employee's telephone to make a call. The superior enters the extension password followed by the Walking COS feature number and his or her extension number, and then makes the call. The same privileges and restrictions normally applied to a user are applied when using Walking COS.
Conditions
When making a call with Walking COS, the extension number of the Walking COS user's extension is also logged by SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)).

2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)

1.2.6 Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension (Walking COS) 2.1.7 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode
Feature Guide
71
1.9 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features
1.9
1.9.1
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Description
The PBX automatically selects the least expensive route (carrier) available at the time a long-distance call is made on an outside (CO) line that has Automatic Route Selection (ARS) enabled. In order to use ARS effectively, various ARS-related tables must be preprogrammed to tell the PBX which calls should be placed using which carriers.
72
Feature Guide
[Flowchart]
A long-distance call is made.
A
Is (another) one digit dialled within the ARS Inter-digit Time? No Yes Each time a digit is dialled, the PBX checks the dialled number (other than Host PBX Access codes, Carrier Exception codes, and First Carrier Access code). Is the dialled number a TRS Denied Code? Yes
Reorder tone
No Is the dialled number an Emergency Call number? Yes No Yes The dialled number is sent to the telephone company.
Is the dialled number a TRS Denied Code? No *1 Does the dialled number include the First Carrier Access code? No Checks the Routing Plan Table (14) to determine which carrier to use. *2 Does the leading number match the Route 14 Selection Code? No Yes
Reorder tone
Yes
The dialled number (other than the First Carrier Access code) is sent to the telephone company.
*3 Does the leading number match the Route 14 Exception Code? No Digits are removed from the dialled number as required.
*4
Yes *5 Digits are added to the dialled number as required. *6 The corresponding Routing Plan Table is selected. Goes to A
Are 7 digits (other than Host PBX Access codes, Carrier Exception codes, and First Carrier Access code) dialled? No Yes The dialled number is sent to the telephone company.
Feature Guide
73
[Programming Procedures]
1. ARS Mode (
ARS Selection [350]) Turn on ARS for each outside (CO) line.
2. First Carrier Access Code*1

Enter the carrier's access code, such as the Host PBX Access code ( Host PBX Access Code [403]), Carrier Exception code ( Carrier Exception Code [300]), or First Carrier Access code ( 1st Carrier Selection Code [359]). For example, if the dialled number is "000-93-425-9477" and the First Carrier Access code is assigned as "000", the modified number is "93-425-9477". Consult your carrier for more information.
3. Routing Plan Table

Leading Number*2 ( Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354]) Store the leading numbers of telephone numbers that should be routed by ARS. Leading Number Exception*3 ( Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358]) Store the telephone numbers that will bypass ARS here. Note that the Outside (CO) Line Access number is always ignored by ARS and does not need to be programmed here. Calls that are exempt from ARS are connected via the default carrier for that line. Removed Number of Digits*4 ( ARS ModificationRemoved Digits [360]) There may be circumstances where the user-dialled number must be modified in order for the carrier to connect the call. In this case, store the number of digits to be removed automatically from the beginning of the dialled number here. Added Number*5 ( ARS ModificationAdded Number [361]) Store the number to be added automatically to the beginning of the dialled number here. ARS Outside (CO) Line Group*6 ( ARS CO Line Group [364]) When making outside (CO) line calls using the Automatic Line Access number (9/0)*, assign the outside (CO) line group(s) for each Routing Plan number here. An outside (CO) line belonging to the assigned outside (CO) line group(s) is automatically seized when making calls using the Automatic Line Access number, and the dialled number is applied to one of the Routing Plan numbers. Note
*
First Carrier
Local Call
Second Carrier Outside (CO) Line PBX

1 2 3
050 (Long-distance Call)
Mobile Jack Third Carrier 05000 (International Call)
Group 1
Group 2
74
Feature Guide
[Programming Example: Routing Plan Table] Modification Routing Plan No. 1 2 3 4 *1 *2 *3 *4 *5 Leading No.*1 4,5 9,0 07 6 Leading No. Exception*2 07 07 Not Stored Not Stored Removed No. of Digits*3 0 0 2 0 Added No.*4 050 050 05000 Not Stored ARS Outside (CO) Line Group*5 All 1 1 2
Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354] Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358] ARS ModificationRemoved Digits [360] ARS ModificationAdded Number [361] ARS CO Line Group [364]
In this example: Dialled Number 9-43-425-9477 Modified Number 050-43-425-9477 Description A long-distance call is made using Routing Plan 1 when the Automatic Line Access number is assigned to "9". A long-distance call is made using Routing Plan 1 when the Automatic Line Access number is assigned to "9". A long-distance call via outside (CO) line group 1 is made using Routing Plan 2. A long-distance call via outside (CO) line group 1 is made using Routing Plan 2.
9-54-123-4567
050-54-123-4567
9-93-425-9477 9-04-123-4567 9-07-81-92-477-1450 9-6-123456
050-93-425-9477 050-04-123-4567
050-00-81-92-477-1450 An international call via outside (CO) line group 1 is made using Routing Plan 3. 6-123456 A mobile telephone call via outside (CO) line group 2 is made using Routing Plan 4.
4. Authorisation Code & Itemised Billing Code Table

Authorisation Code ( Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384]) An Authorisation code for each carrier can be assigned for each outside (CO) line, if required by the carrier. The registered codes are not shown on proprietary telephone (PT) displays or System Data Dump printouts ( System Data Dump [804]) after programming, but "Already Set" will be shown instead. Itemised Billing Code ( Itemised Billing Code [389]) An Itemised Billing code can be assigned for each extension. It is possible to add the Itemised Billing code assigned to an extension to the Authorisation code for the carrier for each outside (CO) line through system programming ( Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388]).
Feature Guide
75
Sequence of Transmitted Code ( Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order [390]) The sequence of transmitted codes (C: Carrier Access Code; A: Authorisation Code; I: Itemised Billing Code; H: Telephone Number) can be selected. When "C.I.A.H" is selected, the dialled numbers of Itemised Billing Code (I) and Authorisation Code (A) are shown on the displays of PTs and SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)). [Programming Example: Authorisation & Itemised Billing Code Table] Modification Routing Plan No. 1 Leading No. 8 Removed No. of Digits 0 Added No. 11223344
Authorisation Code*1 0123456789 (on CO 1/2)
Itemised Billing*2 Enable (on CO 1/2) (Itemised Billing Code: Extn. 101)
11223344PPPP #012345 (PPPP: 6 s, #: Pulse to Tone Conversion ( 1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection))
67890123456 Enable (on CO 1) 789 (on CO 1) (Itemised Billing Code: Extn. 101)
*1 *2
Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384] Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388]
In this example: Dialled Number 9-893-425-9477 (Extn. 101)

Pulse*1
Modified Number
Tone
Description A call via provider access is made using Routing Plan 1 when the Automatic Line Access number is assigned to "9". The Authorisation code and the Itemised Billing code are transmitted in tone mode. The pause time is automatically inserted before entering the Authorisation code.
11223344-P*2-0123456789-101-893-425-9477
Added No.
Authorisation Itemised Telephone Code Billing Code No.
Pulse*1 (
Dial Mode [401]) Pause Time [417])
P (Pause)*2 (
9-593-425-9477 (Extn. 101)
A call via provider access is made using 11223344-PPPP-012345-P-67890123456789-101-593-425-9477 Routing Plan 2 when the Automatic Line Access number is assigned to Added No. Authorisation Itemised Telephone "9". Code Billing Code No.
Pulse Tone
76
Feature Guide
Conditions
WARNING The software contained in the ARS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognise newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service. Failure to upgrade the on-premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognise the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and users of the PBX from gaining access to the network and to these codes. KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA. ARS Inter-digit Time The inter-digit time used while the PBX is checking the dialled number for the ARS feature can be specified through system programming ( ARS Inter-digit Time [363]). TRS TRS checks are performed before ARS number modification, so programme TRS Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables accordingly ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)). If an extension user makes calls using the Automatic Line Access number, and the leading number of a dialled telephone number does not match any entries found in the Leading Number, an outside (CO) line enabled in Automatic Designated Line Access [419] is automatically seized. The PBX checks the number repeatedly until 7 digits have been dialled. If an extension user makes an outside (CO) line call by directly pressing a Single-CO (S-CO), GroupCO (G-CO), or Other-CO (O-CO) button or by dialling an assigned Outside (CO) Line Group Access number, and the seized outside (CO) line has been enabled in ARS Selection [350], the call is made with the ARS feature.
Feature Guide
77
1.10 Conversation Features

1.10.1 Hands-free Operation
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can talk to another party without lifting the handset. Pressing specific buttons automatically activates hands-free mode.
Conditions
PTs with the MONITOR Button PTs with the MONITOR button can dial in hands-free mode but cannot have hands-free conversations. Hands-free mode is cancelled if an extension user does not start dialling within 10 seconds. This feature can be used by pressing the following buttons when the indicator of the SP-PHONE/ MONITOR button is off: SP-PHONE button MONITOR button INTERCOM button CO button

1.4.8 Talking to Another Party without Lifting the Handset (Hands-free Operation)
78
Feature Guide
1.10.2 Room Monitor

Description
An extension user can monitor a room or a door through another proprietary telephone (PT) or a doorphone without the destination party knowing.
Conditions
To monitor using this feature, an extension must have a PT with an AUTO ANS/MUTE button or a single line telephone (SLT) with a MUTE button. To be monitored using this feature, an extension must have a PT with an AUTO ANS/MUTE button. System programming determines the extensions that can be monitored using this feature ( Room Monitor [612]). A doorphone access tone will be sent to a monitored doorphone before monitoring starts ( 1.15.1 Doorphone Call). If an extension user wants to monitor a doorphone without informing the other party, it is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming ( Doorphone Access Tone [707]). Access tones will not be sent to a monitored PT. Paging tones will also not be received by a monitored PT.

1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer
Feature Guide
79
1.10.3 Microphone Mute

Description
During a conversation, a proprietary telephone (PT) user can disable the built-in microphone to consult privately with others in the room while listening to the other party on the phone through the built-in speaker. When Microphone Mute is active, the user can hear the other party's voice, but the user's voice is muted.
Conditions
This feature is only available on PTs that have an AUTO ANS/MUTE button.

1.4.6 Muting a Microphone (Microphone Mute)
80
Feature Guide
1.10.4 Headset Operation

Description
This PBX supports headset-compatible proprietary telephones (PTs). A PT user can talk to another party without lifting the handset by using an optional headset. For connection and operation, refer to the Operating Instructions for the headset. This feature is also known as Handset/Headset Selection.
Conditions
Headset users cannot use the Automatic Redial feature ( 1.6.1.4 Redial). To set headset mode on a PT, use the handset/headset selector located on the telephone and/or on the headset. If headset mode is on, pressing the SP-PHONE button activates the headset, not the built- in speaker.

1.4.7 Using the Headset (Headset Operation)
Feature Guide
81
1.10.5 Data Line Security

Description
Once Data Line Security is set on an extension, communication between the extension and the other party is protected from signals such as Call Waiting, Hold Recall, and Executive Busy Override. Extensions that have devices such as modems, fax machines, or Voice Processing Systems (VPSs) connected to them may set this feature to maintain secure data transmission, by blocking tones or other interruptions during communication.

1.7.6 Protecting Your Line against Notification Tones (Data Line Security)
82
Feature Guide
1.10.6 Flash/Recall
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can use the FLASH/RECALL button to disconnect the current call and start another call without hanging up. For example, if this button is used to disconnect an outside (CO) line, the extension user will hear a new dial tone from the same outside (CO) line.
Conditions
FLASH/RECALL Button Mode One of the following modes can be selected through system programming ( [110]): Flash/Recall Key Mode
a) MODE 1: EFA mode (
1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA)) An EFA signal is sent for the specified duration ( Flash/Recall Time [418]).
b) MODE 2: Flash/Recall mode

A flash/recall signal is sent for the FLASH/RECALL button is pressed if the length of time that the button is pressed is longer than the specified duration ( Flash/Recall Time [418]). If the length of time that the button is pressed is shorter than the specified duration, an EFA signal will be sent for the specified duration. This feature functions only if the FLASH/RECALL button is set to "MODE 2: Flash/Recall mode". Disconnect Time The amount of time between successive accesses to the same outside (CO) line is programmable for each outside (CO) line ( Disconnect Time [422]). This feature generates an SMDR call record ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)) and restarts the call timer. The notation "F/" will be logged along with the new dial number.
Feature Guide
83
1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA)

Description
An extension user can access features of a host PBX or the telephone company, such as Call Waiting. An EFA (External Feature Access) signal is sent to the host PBX or the telephone company. This is only available on outside (CO) line calls, including Host PBX Access ( 1.5.2.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)).
Conditions
This feature functions only if the FLASH/RECALL button is set to "MODE 1: EFA mode" ( 1.10.6 Flash/Recall). It is also possible to perform this feature by entering the EFA feature number when the current call is placed on consultation hold ( 1.12.5 Consultation Hold). Flash/Recall Time The length of an EFA signal can be selected for each outside (CO) line ( Flash/Recall Time [418]).

1.8.2 If a Host PBX is Connected
84
Feature Guide
1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation

Description
Outside (CO) line calls are limited by the following features: Feature Extension-to-Outside (CO) Line Call Duration Description When a call between an extension user and an outside party is established, the call duration is restricted by a timer ( Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212]). Both parties will hear a warning tone at 5second intervals 15 seconds before the timer expires. When the timer expires, the call is disconnected. System programming determines which extensions have calls limited by this feature ( CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613]). This timer applies to outside (CO) line calls that are made via the PBX. When a call between 2 outside parties is established, the call duration is restricted by a timer ( CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). Both parties will hear a warning tone 15 seconds before the timer expires. When the timer expires, the call is disconnected.
Outside-to-Outside (CO-toCO) Line Call Duration
Conditions
Lockout If one party in a conversation goes on-hook, the call between both parties will be disconnected. A reorder tone is sent to the off-hook party before the call is disconnected. No operation is necessary. When an extension user seizes an outside (CO) line and then transfers the call to another extension user who can use this feature, the Extension-to-Outside (CO) Line Call Duration timer starts after the transferred call is answered by the outside party. The Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Call Duration feature applies to the following calls: Calls forwarded by the FWD to Outside (CO) Line feature ( 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)) Calls transferred by the Call Transfer to Outside (CO) Line feature ( 1.11.1 Call Transfer) Calls using the DISA feature ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)) Calls using the Unattended Conference feature ( 1.13.1.2 Conference)
Feature Guide
85
1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone

Description
Any proprietary telephone (PT) can be connected in parallel with a single line device, such as a single line telephone (SLT), fax machine, or modem. When parallel mode is used, the 2 telephones function as follows: Both share one extension number. Either telephone or device can make or answer calls.
Conditions
System programming determines the SLTs that can be connected in parallel with a PT ( Parallelled Telephone [610]). When the SLT is in operation, the display and LED (Light Emitting Diode) indicator on the paired PT will function in the same way as when the PT is in operation. The following features cannot be used with an SLT connected in parallel with a PT: Call Splitting Conference Door Open while connected to the doorphone External Feature Access (EFA) Hot Line An SLT connected in parallel with a PT will not ring if the PT is: In Hands-free Answerback mode ( 1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback). In Voice-calling mode (Alternate ReceivingRing/Voice) ( 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call). An extension user cannot make a call from the SLT if the PT is: Playing background music (BGM) Receiving a paging announcement over the built-in speaker In programming mode Both the PT and the SLT will ring for incoming calls (if the ringer is turned on).

2.5.2 Connecting Extensions in Parallel
86
Feature Guide
1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection

Description
A CPC (Calling Party Control) signal is an on-hook indication (disconnect signal) sent from an outside (CO) line when the other party hangs up. To maintain efficient utilisation of outside (CO) lines, the PBX monitors each line's status and when a CPC signal is detected on a line, the PBX disconnects the line and alerts the extension with a reorder tone.
Conditions
CPC Signal Detection is programmable for incoming outside (CO) line calls ( CPC Signal DetectionIncoming [420]) and for outgoing outside (CO) line calls ( CPC Signal Detection Outgoing [421]). If a CPC signal is detected during a call between a caller using the DISA feature ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)) and an extension or an outside party, the call will be disconnected. It is possible to select whether the PBX detects the reverse signal from incoming outside (CO) line calls for the duration ( CPC Signal DetectionIncoming [420]) specified through system programming ( Incoming Reverse [153]).
Feature Guide
87
1.11 Transferring Features

1.11.1 Call Transfer
Description
An extension user can transfer a call to another extension or to an outside party. The following features are available: Feature With Announcement Without Announcement Transferring method Transfer is completed after announcing the transfer to the destination party. Transfer is completed without an announcement. After dialling the destination extension number and hearing a ringback tone or busy tone, the originator can replace the handset.
Call Transfer with Announcement is also known as Call TransferScreened. Call Transfer without Announcement is also known as Call TransferUnscreened.
Conditions
System programming determines the extensions that are able to transfer calls to an outside party ( Call Transfer to CO Line [606]). Single line telephone (SLT) users cannot transfer calls to an outside party. Transfer Recall for Call Transfer without Announcement If the transfer destination extension does not answer within a preprogrammed time period ( Transfer Recall Time [201]), the call will return to the extension that transferred the call. If there is no answer for 30 minutes after Transfer Recall starts, the call will be disconnected. One-touch Transfer Direct Station Selection (DSS) Console users and proprietary telephone (PT) users can hold an outside (CO) line call and quickly transfer it to an extension by pressing the DSS button directly ( One-touch Transfer Using a DSS Button [005]). A flexible CO/DSS/MESSAGE button can also be customised as a DSS button. Music, if available, is sent to the held outside party while the call is being transferred ( 1.12.4 Music on Hold). An internal audio source, external audio source, or tone can be selected as the Music on Hold through system programming ( Music on Hold [111]). Outside (CO) Line Call Duration If an outside (CO) line call is transferred to an outside party, the call duration will be restricted by a system timer ( CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). Both parties will hear a warning tone 15 seconds before the timer expires ( 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation). The extension that transferred the call will also hear a ring tone or an alarm tone 50 seconds before the timer expires ( 1.12.1 Call Hold). When the timer expires, the call is disconnected unless the extension joins the conversation again. If a CPC (Calling Party Control) signal or reverse signal is received from an outside (CO) line, the corresponding call between 2 outside parties will be disconnected. Consultation Hold When a transferring party presses the TRANSFER button on a PT or the Recall/hookswitch on an SLT, the transferred party is automatically placed on consultation hold ( 1.12.5 Consultation Hold).
88
Feature Guide


1.4.1 Transferring a Call (Call Transfer)
Feature Guide
89
1.12 Holding Features

1.12.1 Call Hold
Description
An extension user can put a call on hold. The following Call Hold features are available: Feature General Call Hold Exclusive Call Hold Description Any extension can retrieve a held call. Only the proprietary telephone (PT) user who held the call can retrieve it.
Pressing the HOLD button multiple times alternates between General and Exclusive Call Hold.
Conditions
Using the Call Hold feature, a PT user can have one intercom call and multiple outside (CO) line calls on hold at the same time. To hold multiple intercom calls, the user should use the Call Park feature ( 1.12.2 Call Park). Using the Call Hold feature, a single line telephone (SLT) user can have either one intercom call or one outside (CO) line call on hold. To hold multiple calls, the user should use the Call Park feature. If an outside party is placed on hold and the call is not retrieved within 30 minutes, the call is automatically disconnected. Music on Hold Music, if available, is sent to the outside party on hold ( 1.12.4 Music on Hold). An internal audio source, external audio source, or tone can be selected as the Music on Hold through system programming ( Music on Hold [111]). Doorphone calls cannot be put on hold. Hold Recall If a call on hold is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period ( Hold Recall Time [200]), a ring tone will be heard at the extension that put the call on hold. If the extension is engaged in a call when the timer expires, an alarm tone will be heard. If the hold recall time is set to "Disable", no tone will be heard. Going off-hook after the hold recall time has expired automatically re-establishes the conversation with the call on hold. SLT Hold Mode It is possible to choose how to hold and transfer a call with an SLT, if the length of time that the Recall/ hookswitch is pressed is shorter than a specified duration ( Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207]). The following methods ( SLT Hold Mode [104]) are available: Mode Hold-1 Hold Pressing the Recall/hookswitch + Going on-hook Transfer to Extension Pressing the Recall/hookswitch + Extension No.
90
Feature Guide
Mode
Hold Pressing the Recall/hookswitch + Call Hold Feature No. + Going on-hook Pressing the Recall/hookswitch + Call Hold Feature No. + Going on-hook
Transfer to Extension Pressing the Recall/hookswitch + Extension No.
Hold-2
Hold-3
Pressing the Recall/hookswitch + Call Hold Feature No. + Extension No.
In some cases, a call is not disconnected when an SLT user goes on-hook. Instead, the call is mistakenly placed on hold. After a specified time expires, the Hold Recall tone is heard. When the SLT user answers this, the user hears a cyclic tone (like a reorder tone). To avoid this problem, select "Hold2" or "Hold-3". In either of these modes, all calls are disconnected when going on-hook, unless the Call Hold feature number is entered after pressing the Recall/hookswitch. It is possible to set each SLT not to receive pulse signals through system programming ( Internal Pulse Detection [614]). This setting helps the PBX to avoid mistaking pulse signals sent by dialling "1" for hooking, in the countries/areas where the length of time that the Recall/hookswitch is pressed is set to "MODE 1: 50180 ms" in Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207].

4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

1.4.2 Holding a Call
Feature Guide
91
1.12.2 Call Park

Description
An extension user can hold a call by placing it into a common parking zone of the PBX. A parked call can be retrieved by any extension user. This feature is useful when an extension user wants to hold more than one intercom call with a proprietary telephone (PT), or more than one intercom call or outside (CO) line call with a single line telephone (SLT).
Conditions
Call Park Recall If a parked call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period ( Hold Recall Time [200]), a ring tone will be heard at the extension that parked the call. If the destination is engaged in a call when the timer expires, an alarm tone will be heard. If a parked call is not retrieved within 30 minutes, it is automatically disconnected. Retry If the specified parking zone is occupied, the extension user will hear a busy tone. While hearing a busy tone, the user can retry by selecting another parking zone.

1.4.2 Holding a Call
92
Feature Guide
1.12.3 Call Splitting

Description
An extension user can speak alternately with 2 parties. Placing the current call on hold allows the user to speak with the other party.
Conditions
This feature does not apply to calls from doorphones or paging announcements. Consultation Hold When the extension user presses the HOLD button on a proprietary telephone (PT) or the Recall/ hookswitch on a single line telephone (SLT), the held party is automatically placed on consultation hold ( 1.12.5 Consultation Hold).

1.4.3 Talking to 2 Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
Feature Guide
93
1.12.4 Music on Hold

Description
An outside party on hold will hear audio to inform the party that the call is still on hold. The following types of audio are available depending on the user's country/area:
a) Internal audio source b) External audio source c) Tone

The audio sources (internal and external) can also be used for BGM ( 1.15.4 Background Music (BGM)).
Conditions
Hardware requirement: A user-supplied audio device, such as a CD player or radio for External audio source. The audio can be selected through system programming ( Music on Hold [111]). Operations such as Call Hold ( 1.12.1 Call Hold) and Call Transfer ( 1.11.1 Call Transfer) activate Music on Hold.

2.8.1 Connecting Peripherals
94
Feature Guide
1.12.5 Consultation Hold

Description
When an extension user is on a call and performs Call Transfer ( 1.11.1 Call Transfer), Call Splitting ( 1.12.3 Call Splitting), or tries to establish a conference call ( 1.13.1.2 Conference), the call is automatically placed on consultation hold. When the operation is completed or cancelled, the consultation hold is released.
Feature Guide
95
1.13 Conference Features

1.13.1 Conference Features
1.13.1.1 Conference FeaturesOVERVIEW
Description
The following features are available to establish a conference call: Feature Conference Executive Busy Override Description An extension user can establish a 3-party or 5-party conference call. An extension user can interrupt an existing call to establish a 3-party conference call. Details in 1.13.1.2 Conference 1.7.2 Executive Busy Override
96
Feature Guide
1.13.1.2 Conference
Description
An extension user can establish a conference call. The following Conference features are available: Feature 3-party Conference Description During a 2-party conversation, an extension user can add a third party to the conversation, thereby establishing a 3-party conference call. Unattended Conference: The proprietary telephone (PT) user who originated a conference with 2 outside parties can leave the conference and allow the other parties to continue the conversation. The user may return to the conference at any time, if he or she desires. A PT user can establish a 3-party to 5-party conference call by entering the 5-party Conference feature number.
5-party Conference
Conditions
[General]
Conference call arrangement The following configurations of 3-party or 5-party conference calls are possible at the same time through system programming ( Conference Pattern [116]): 3-party conference calls between 3 extensions: Up to 3 3-party conference calls between one extension and 2 outside parties: Up to 4 3-party conference calls between 2 extensions and one outside party: Up to 4 5-party conference call with up to 5 extensions or with a combination of extensions and up to 2 outside parties: One Conference Button On a PT that does not have a CONF (Conference) button, a flexible CO button can be customised as a Conference button. Consultation Hold When an extension user tries to establish a conference call, the current call is automatically placed on consultation hold until the conference is established ( 1.12.5 Consultation Hold).
[3-party Conference]
A confirmation tone will be sent to all parties when a 2-party conference call is changed to a 3-party conference call. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming ( Conference Tone [105]). Unattended Conference Recall The duration of unattended conferences is restricted by a system timer ( CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). A ring tone or an alarm tone is heard at the conference originator's extension 50 seconds before the timer expires. A warning tone starts to be heard by parties in the unattended conference 15 seconds before the timer expires. If the originator returns to the conference before the unattended conference call is disconnected, the timer will be cancelled. If not, the ring tone or alarm tone and the warning tone will continue to be heard until the unattended conference call is disconnected ( 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation).
Feature Guide
97
An unattended conference cannot be established unless the extension is allowed to transfer a call to an outside party through system programming ( Call Transfer to CO Line [606]).
[5-party Conference]
The following features will not function during a 5-party conference call: Call Hold Call Park Call Splitting Call Transfer Executive Busy Override Unattended Conference A confirmation tone will be sent to all parties when a 5-party conference call is established and when a 5-party conference call is changed to a 4-party conference call or vice versa. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming ( Conference Tone [105]).


1.4.5 Talking to Multiple Parties (Conference)
98
Feature Guide
1.14 Paging Features
1.14 Paging Features

1.14.1 Paging
Description
An extension user can make a paging announcement to several people at once. The announcement is heard through the built-in speakers of proprietary telephones (PTs) and/or an external pager (loudspeaker), depending on the type of Paging that is performed as follows: Type All Extensions External Group All Extensions & External Paging method The page is heard through the built-in speakers of all PTs. The page is heard through an external pager. The page is heard through the built-in speakers of the PTs that belong to a certain extension group ( Extension Group [600]). The page is heard through the built-in speakers of all PTs and an external pager simultaneously.
The paged person can answer the page from a nearby telephone. It is possible to page with a call on hold in order to transfer the call. Paging Deny It is possible for each extension to deny being paged.
Conditions
Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied external pager. A confirmation tone will be sent to the external pager before the paging announcement. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming ( External Pager Access Tone [106]). Only one person can use this feature at a time. Extensions that cannot be paged are: Ringing or busy PTs PTs in Paging Deny mode PTs in DND mode ( 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND))


1.6.1 Paging 1.6.2 Answering/Denying a Paging Announcement
Feature Guide
99
1.15 Optional Device Features

1.15.1 Doorphone Call
Description
A visitor can use a doorphone to call its preprogrammed destination. Extension users can call a doorphone. Doorphones can also be used for the Room Monitor feature ( 1.10.2 Room Monitor).
Conditions
Hardware Requirement: An optional doorphone, and doorphone card. Doorphones 1 and 2 (or doorphones 3 and 4) cannot be used at the same time. When one is in use, the user cannot have a conversation with the other. A doorphone access tone will be sent to a monitored doorphone before monitoring starts. If an extension user wants to monitor a doorphone without informing the other party, it is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming ( Doorphone Access Tone [707]). Ring Duration If an incoming doorphone call is not answered within a preprogrammed time period ( Doorphone Ring Time [708]), ringing stops and the call is cancelled. An extension user can choose the preferred ring tone pattern for doorphone calls through system programming ( Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706]). Call Destination System programming determines the extensions that can receive calls from each doorphone for each time service mode ( Doorphone RingingDay/Night/Lunch [700-702]). Door Open While on a doorphone call, an extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in ( 1.15.2 Door Open). When a doorphone call is received at a proprietary telephone (PT), a tone is heard instead of ringing.

2.3.6 4-Port Doorphone Card (KX-TE82461) 2.6 Connecting Doorphones and Door Openers


1.8.1 If a Doorphone/Door Opener is Connected
100
Feature Guide
1.15.2 Door Open

Description
Using an extension telephone, an extension user can unlock a door for a visitor. The door can be unlocked by extension users who are allowed through system programming to unlock the door for each time service mode ( Door OpenerDay/Night/Lunch [703-705]). While on a doorphone call, any extension user can unlock a door to let a visitor in ( 1.15.1 Doorphone Call).
Conditions
Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied door opener installed on each door. A door opener can unlock a door even if no doorphone is installed. Door Open Duration An opened door will remain unlocked for a preprogrammed length of time ( Door Open Duration [709]).

2.6 Connecting Doorphones and Door Openers

Feature Guide
101
1.15.3 Doorbell/Door Chime

Description
Extension users can choose how their telephones receive doorphone calls, by selecting to hear ringing, a chime, or both, provided a doorbell/door chime connected to a door opener is connected to the PBX. They can recognise which doorphone is ringing by selecting a different doorphone chime pattern for each doorphone. [Programming Example] In order for an extension connected to extension jack 01 (extension 101) to be able to receive a doorphone call from a doorbell/door chime connected to Relay 4, programme as follows: Programming 1 Doorphone Ringing*1 Enable (extn. 101) Chime Relay 4 Pattern 1 2 Enable (extn. 101) Chime Relay 4 Pattern 2 Doorphone 3 Enable (extn. 101) Chime Relay 4 Pattern 3 4 Enable (extn. 101) Chime Relay 4 Pattern 4
Doorphone Ring/Chime*2 Doorphone Chime Assignment*3 Doorphone Chime Pattern*4 *1 *2 *3 *4
Doorphone RingingDay/Night/Lunch [700-702] Doorphone Ring/Chime [710] Doorphone Chime Assignment [711] Doorphone Chime Pattern [712]
In this example When a visitor presses the Call button of Doorphone 2: A doorbell/door chime, connected to Relay 4, chimes with Pattern 2. Because Doorphone Ring/Chime is set to "Chime", extension 101 does not ring. The extension user who is allowed to receive a call from Doorphone 2 can answer the doorphone call by going off-hook within a preprogrammed time period ( Doorphone Ring Time [708]). If the user is allowed to unlock the door ( Door OpenerDay/Night/Lunch [703-705]), he or she can then unlock the door by entering the Door Open feature number. If the called extension is busy and has set Call Waiting, the extension user hears a call waiting tone and the call information flashes on the display.
Conditions
Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied doorbell/door chime connected to each door opener.

2.6 Connecting Doorphones and Door Openers 2.7 Connecting Doorbell or Door Chime
102
Feature Guide


Feature Guide
103
1.15.4 Background Music (BGM)

Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can listen to background music (BGM) through the built-in speaker while on-hook and idle.
Conditions
Hardware requirement: A user-supplied external audio device, such as a CD player or radio for External audio source. The music heard through the PT is interrupted when going off-hook, receiving a call, or receiving a paging announcement. The audio can be selected through system programming ( Music on Hold [111]). This feature can be turned on and off by dialling "1" while the extension is on-hook and idle, if BGM is enabled through system programming ( BGM Control for APT [626]).


1.7.5 Turning on the Background Music (BGM)
104
Feature Guide
1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD

Description
An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can record outgoing messages (OGMs) for the following features: Feature Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Usage Details in
When a call arrives on a DISA line, the caller will hear 1.15.6 Direct a DISA OGM. Inward System Access (DISA)
1.15.6 Direct 3-level Automated Attendant When the DISA AA service is active, the caller will (AA) hear a DISA OGM. The DISA AA service supports up Inward System to 3 levels of DISA OGMs. Access (DISA) Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) When a call arrives at a UCD group and all extensions 1.2.2 Uniform in the group are busy, the caller will hear a UCD OGM Call Distribution ( UCD Waiting Message [527]). (UCD)
Conditions
This feature functions differently from personal/common BV OGMs used by the BV feature ( 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)). To use this feature, "DISA" or "UCD" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416]). The operator or manager can record a maximum of 32 messages (8 messages for DISA/UCD and 24 messages for 3-level AA). When an optional message expansion card for DISA/UCD OGMs is added, up to 2 messages can be played simultaneously for callers, and the total recording time of the PBX is increased from 3 to 6 minutes. After recording messages, the operator and manager can also play them back for confirmation. In addition, the operator and manager can erase messages for DISA/UCD. When the operator or manager tries to record or play back a message, he or she will hear an alarm tone if the message channel is in use. Prerecorded messages will not be cleared by a system restart. To clear them, use system programming ( Clear All OGMs of DISA/UCD [599]).

2.3.7 Message Expansion Card for DISA/UCD OGMs (KX-TE82491)

2.1.7 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode
Feature Guide
105
1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Description
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) allows outside callers to be connected to their desired PBX destinations without the use of the operator. Callers can listen to a DISA outgoing message (OGM) instructing them as to which numbers to dial to be connected to the person or department they would like to speak with. DISA can also give PBX users access to PBX features, such as making outside (CO) line calls, when they are outside the office. This DISA OGM can guide callers and allow them to: Call an extension by dialling the extension number. Call another outside party via the outside (CO) lines of the PBX. Access the desired extension simply by dialling a single-digit number (DISA Automated Attendant [AA] number) using DISA AA service.
DISA OGM
When a call arrives on a DISA line, callers will hear a DISA OGM or a short beep. When the DISA AA service is active, this DISA OGM will direct callers to dial the appropriate digit (DISA AA number) to be connected to a specified destination. To access other PBX features, such as making intercom or outside (CO) line calls, the caller may dial the appropriate numbers while the DISA OGM is playing. An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can record a DISA OGM ( 1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD).
DISA AA Service
DISA AA service allows a caller to dial a single-digit number (DISA AA number) and be connected to the desired party automatically. The PBX can store up to 10 destinations that can be called by dialling a DISA AA number (09) for each DISA OGM ( DISA Built-in AA [501]). These destinations can be an extension number ( Extension Number [009]), an extension group number ( Extension Group [600]), or the DISA AA number of a 3-level DISA OGM ( 3-level AA Assignment [540-549]). After or while listening to the DISA OGM or a short beep, the caller may dial a DISA AA number as directed by the DISA OGM (e.g., "Press 1 to speak to Sales. Press 2 to speak to Support."). Each DISA AA number directs the call to a preprogrammed location. Since DISA AA numbers are single digits, if the caller dials a second digit within a preprogrammed time period ( DISA AA Wait Time [517]), DISA AA service will be bypassed because the PBX will assume the caller is trying to access a specific feature. When the DISA AA service is used, Incoming Dial Mode must be set to "With AA" through system programming ( DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500]). When "With AA" is selected, the PBX regards callerdialled digits "0" through "9" as DISA AA numbers. If no destination is assigned to "9" or "0", the PBX regards the number (9/0)* as the Automatic Line Access number ( Automatic Line Access [121]) or Operator Call number. Note
*
106
Feature Guide
[Programming Example: 1-level (DISA) AA Table] In order for a caller to be able to access Mike Smith (extension 102) using 1-level (DISA) AA, programme as follows: Distribution method*1 Day 1, 2 38 DISA OGM1 Normal Lunch DISA OGM1 Normal Night DISA OGM1 Normal
Outside (CO) Line No.
DISA AA No. for 1-level AA*2 0 1 Mike Smith (102) 2 Extn. 103 3 Extn. 104 4 Extn. 105 5 Extn. 106 6 Extn. 107 7 Extn. 108 8 Extn. Group 1 9
*1 *2
CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416] DISA Built-in AA [501]
[Programming Example: 3-level AA Table] In order for a caller to be able to access Mike Smith of the Software Support Team (extension 102) using 3level AA, programme as follows: Distribution method*1 Day 14 58 DISA OGM1 Normal Lunch DISA OGM2 Normal Night DISA OGM3 Normal
Outside (CO) Line No.
Feature Guide
107
1-level AA DISA AA No.*2 0
Extn. Extn. 2-level Group 1 Group 2 AA*3
Extn. 3-level Extn. Group 3 AA*5 Group 4

Extn. 101
1
Mike Smith (102)*6
CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416] *1 DISA Built-in AA [501] *2 *3 2-level AA: Select "3-level AA" for AA number "3" in DISA Built-in AA [501] 3-level AA Assignment [540-549] *4 *5 3-level AA: Select "3-level AA" for "second AA number 2" and for "third AA number in the [543] of 3-level AA Assignment [540-549] 6 Mike Smith (102): Select "Jack 02" for "second AA number 2" and for "third AA * number 1" in the [543] of 3-level AA Assignment [540-549] In this example:
"
1) After or while listening to the AA first-level DISA OGM (e.g., "Press 1 to speak to Sales. Press 2 to
speak to Service. Press 3 to speak to Support."), caller dials a DISA AA number, "3", as directed by the DISA OGM.
2) Next, the AA second-level DISA OGM (e.g., "Press 1 to speak to Hardware Team. Press 2 to speak
to Software Team.") directs the caller to dial another DISA AA number. The caller dials "2".
3) Last, the AA third-level DISA OGM (e.g., "Press 1 to speak to Mike Smith. Press 0 to speak to the
Operator.") directs the caller to dial a DISA AA number, "1", to be connected to a specified destination, extension 102. Note When the type of a destination from 2level AA or 3level AA to another setting is changed, any associated DISA OGM will also be cleared. In addition, any items within the AA menu being removed will also be removed.
108
Feature Guide
DISA Busy Mode

If the destination of a DISA call is busy, the call will be redirected to an idle extension ( Hunting Group Set [100]) in the destination's idle extension hunting group ( 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting). If no extension in the group is available, or if the destination of the DISA call is not a member of an idle extension hunting group, the call will be handled in one of the following ways, according to system programming ( DISA Busy Mode [506]):
a) Disconnect: The caller hears a busy tone and the call is disconnected. b) Call Waiting: The called extension hears a call waiting tone if the extension has set Call Waiting. c) DISA: The following procedure is performed: 1) If the assigned DISA OGM (busy message) has been recorded, the caller hears the DISA
OGM (e.g., "The party you called is unavailable..."). If the assigned DISA OGM has not been recorded, the caller hears a busy tone and the call is disconnected.
2) After the busy message has been played, the DISA OGM that was sent before the busy
message is sent to the caller again.
3) The PBX waits for the caller to enter a new destination. In this case, the PBX does not accept
any Outside Line Access number regardless of the security type. If the destination is a member of a DISA ring group, DISA Busy Mode will not function for the call. The PBX regards it as unanswered.
DISA Intercept Mode

If the destination of a DISA call does not answer the call within a preprogrammed time period ( DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508]), the call will be handled in one of the following ways, according to system programming ( DISA Intercept Mode [507]):
a) Disconnect: The call is disconnected. b) Intercept: The call is redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations in the following priority:
DISA IRNA to BVDay/Night/Lunch [438-440] Flexible RingingDay/Night/Lunch [408-410] This is useful for business calls. For example, the call can be forwarded to the operator, a Voice Processing System (VPS) or Built-in Voice Message (BV) automatically.
DISA No Dial Mode

If the PBX does not receive either DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) signals or a fax (CNG) tone within a preprogrammed time period ( DISA Wait Time after OGM [505]), or if the PBX does not receive DTMF signals within a preprogrammed time period ( Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515]), the call will be handled in one of the following ways, according to system programming ( DISA No Dial Mode [510]):
a) Disconnect: The call is disconnected. b) Intercept: The call is redirected to preprogrammed intercept destinations in the following priority:
DISA IRNA to BVDay/Night/Lunch [438-440] Flexible RingingDay/Night/Lunch [408-410]
DISA Security Mode

Security can be enabled for the PBX to control the types of calls that can be made by callers using DISA. When the DISA security mode is set to "All Security" or "Trunk Security" ( DISA Security Mode [511]), a caller is required to enter a DISA security code ( DISA Security Code [512]) before making intercom and outside (CO) line calls, or outside (CO) line calls only, respectively. The DISA security code and the number of digits required for the DISA security code ( DISA Security Code Digits [530]) can be assigned by the manager. After entering a DISA security code, if the code is the same as one of the preprogrammed security codes, the caller will hear a short beep. It is possible to eliminate the tone through system programming ( DISA Tone after Security Code [518]). If the DISA security code is entered incorrectly 3 times when using DISA, a reorder tone will be sent to the caller and the call will be disconnected.
Feature Guide
109
Security Mode All Security Trunk Security No Security Permitted
Intercom Calls
Outside (CO) Line Calls
Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Calls through DISA

DISA callers can use DISA to make outside (CO) line calls when allowed by the DISA security mode. If a call between 2 outside parties is established via DISA, the length of the call can be limited to a preprogrammed duration ( CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]). A timer will activate when the call is connected, and a warning tone will be heard 15 seconds before the timer expires. When the timer expires, the call is disconnected ( 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation). To detect the end of an outside-to-outside (CO-to-CO) line call, Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection can be assigned through system programming ( CPC Signal DetectionIncoming [420], CPC Signal DetectionOutgoing [421]).
110
Feature Guide
[Flowchart]
A DISA call from an outside party is received. (DISA Delayed Answer Time expires) The PBX answers the call. (DISA OGM Mute Time expires) No One short beep (Intercept Time for Internal DISA expires) Is the assigned DISA OGM recorded? Yes
DISA OGM
(DISA Wait Timer after OGM expires) Cyclic tone, CPC signal Fax (CNG) tone The call is sent to the fax extension. All The call is disconnected. Busy tone
A number is dialled. Is a security code required? No The security code is entered. One short beep The code is correct. Yes
Nothing is dialled. What is the security mode? Trunk or No Is Intercept Routing employed? No Yes
Goes to C Make an outside (CO) line call. The call reaches the destination. (DISA Ring Time before Intercept expires) The code is incorrect. Reorder tone The call is disconnected.
The call is disconnected. The call is established.
The call is established.
The call is not answered.
The destination extension(s) is(are) busy.
The call is not answered for 40 seconds.
B
Is Intercept Routing employed? Yes No Disconnect Busy tone Is DISA IRNA to BV assigned? No Yes BV is answered. (DISA Ring Time before Intercept expires) The call is disconnected. The call is established. The call is not answered. Goes to B (DISA Ring Time after Intercept expires) The call is established. The call is not answered. The call is disconnected. A busy DISA OGM is heard. Goes to A Call Waiting DISA What is the DISA Busy Mode? The call is disconnected.
The call is sent to another extension.
Feature Guide
111
Conditions
WARNING There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Call feature of DISA. The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX. To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a) b) c) d)

Enabling DISA security (Trunk Security or All Security). Maintaining the secrecy of passwords. Selecting passwords that are complex and random, so that they cannot be easily guessed. Changing passwords regularly. The maximum recording time of each message is 3 minutes. The preinstalled DISA/UCD OGM card can play only one message at a time and the maximum recording time is 3 minutes. When an optional message expansion card for DISA/UCD OGMs is added, up to 2 messages can be played simultaneously for callers, and the total recording time of the PBX is increased to 6 minutes. To use this feature, "DISA" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416]). DISA Delayed Answer Time It is possible to set the DISA Delayed Answer time ( DISA Delayed Answer Time [504]) so that the caller will hear a ringback tone for a preprogrammed length of time before hearing a DISA OGM or a short beep. Call Forwarding (FWD) to Outside (CO) Line When a DISA call is forwarded to an outside party, the caller is not required to enter a DISA security code regardless of the security mode. DISA OGM Mute Time Certain DTMF signals, such as Caller ID information, may be sent from the telephone company when a call is first connected. Because these signals may interfere with DISA, the PBX can be programmed to ignore DTMF signals for a specified amount of time ( OGM Mute Time [519]) after a call is connected. After the DISA OGM Mute Time passes, DTMF signals are recognised by the PBX and the DISA OGM begins playing or a short beep is sent. SMDR The following are logged by SMDR for DISA calls ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)): The destination of the DISA call DISA security code status Call Deny System programming determines which extensions can receive DISA calls ( DISA Incoming Assignment [516]). If a DISA call is received at an extension that has Call Deny set, the caller will hear a reorder tone and the call will be disconnected automatically. If a DISA call is received by a DISA ring group, this programme does not function for extensions in that DISA ring group and these extensions will still ring. Cyclic Tone Detection It is possible to select the number of times a cyclic tone must be detected while the DISA OGM is sent ( Cyclic Tone Detection [513]). Cyclic Tone Detection can be used to disconnect an outside-tooutside (CO-to-CO) line call via DISA. Fax Connection System programming determines the extensions that are able to receive fax data when the PBX receives a fax (CNG) tone via the DISA feature ( FAX Connection [503]). The preprogrammed extension will automatically have the Data Line Security feature set.
112
Feature Guide
Fax Tone Detection It is possible to select the number of times the fax (CNG) tone must be detected while the DISA OGM is sent before the PBX recognises the incoming signal as fax data ( FAX Tone Detection [514]). If the assigned DISA OGM has not been recorded or if the DISA OGM is short (05 s), in some cases the fax (CNG) tone may not be detected. In this case, it is recommended to set the length of time the PBX keeps detecting a fax (CNG) tone after completing a DISA OGM to "10 s" or "15 s" through system programming ( DISA Wait Time after OGM [505]). It is programmable whether a ringback tone ( Ringback Tone Pattern [128]) or Music on Hold ( Music on Hold [111]) is sent to the caller when a DISA call is received ( DISA Ringback Tone [531]).

2.3.7 Message Expansion Card for DISA/UCD OGMs (KX-TE82491)

1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)

1.2.7 Accessing Another Party Directly from Outside (Direct Inward System Access [DISA]) 3.3.1 Programming Information
Feature Guide
113
1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)

Description
If an optional voice message card is installed in the PBX, a caller can leave a voice message in a user's personal message area or the PBX's common message area. Information on the recorded messages is automatically logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension, where it can be viewed later or used to play back the original message ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log). The optional voice message card has 2 voice message resources (Built-in Voice Message [BV] resource 1 and BV resource 2), and every extension must belong to one of these resources based on system programming ( BV Resource [621]). Extension users other than the operator or manager can access the following options: Personal BV outgoing messages (OGMs) Personal voice messages (left by callers via Call Forwarding [FWD] or Direct Message) Messages can be recorded, played, and erased by that extension's user. The operator or manager can access the following options: Personal BV OGMs for the operator or manager Personal voice messages (left by callers via FWD or Direct Message for the operator or manager) Common BV OGMs for the company Common voice messages (left by callers for the company) Messages can be recorded, played, and erased by the operator or manager only. Up to 125 voice messages with a total recording time of 60 minutes can be logged per BV resource. All personal/common message areas within each BV resource share the total space of the resource. For example, in BV resource 1, if the common message area currently has 10 messages, totalling 10 minutes, the personal and common message areas can jointly store up to 115 messages or 50 minutes. [Example: Pattern A]
BV Resource 1 Operator or Manager (Extn. 101) Common Message Area Common BV OGM Common Voice Message Extn. 102 Personal Message Area Personal BV OGM Personal Voice Message Extn. 103 Personal Message Area Personal BV OGM Personal Voice Message BV Resource 2
Extn. 124 Personal Message Area Personal BV OGM Personal Voice Message
Personal Message Area Personal BV OGM Personal Voice Message
Total message recording time: 60 minutes max. Max. number of messages: 125 messages (including Common/Personal BV OGMs and Common/Personal Voice Messages)
Total message recording time: 60 minutes max. Max. number of messages: 125 messages (including Personal BV OGMs and Personal Voice Messages)
114
Feature Guide
[Example: Pattern B]
BV Resource 1 Operator or Manager (Extn. 101) Common Message Area Common BV OGM Common Voice Message Extn. 102 Personal Message Area Personal BV OGM Personal Voice Message BV Resource 2
[Example: Pattern C]
BV Resource 1 Manager (Extn. 101) Personal Message Area Personal BV OGM Personal Voice Message Operator (Extn. 113) Common Message Area Common BV OGM Common Voice Message BV Resource 2
If there are new voice messages in a user's personal message area or the common message area (if accessible), the user will hear a special dial tone (dial tone 4) when going off-hook. In addition, if that user's
Feature Guide
115
telephone has a MESSAGE button or Message/Ringer Lamp, the corresponding button or lamp will light when a message has been left. A MESSAGE button can be used to listen to the message after the user goes off-hook. Pressing the lit MESSAGE button on a display proprietary telephone (PT) while on-hook shows voice message information. The BV feature allows users to also perform the following operations: If outside (CO) line calls are preprogrammed to be automatically directed to a common message area ( CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416]), or if Direct Inward System Access (DISA) calls are preprogrammed to be redirected to a common message area via Intercept Routing ( DISA IRNA to BVDay/Night/Lunch [438-440]), the caller will hear a common BV OGM and can leave a voice message directly in the common message area. [Programming Example] Outside (CO) Line No. 1 2 (Cont.) : : 8 *1 *2 Distribution method*1 Day BV01*3 DISA OGM3 : : Normal Night BV02*3 DISA OGM4 : : Normal Lunch BV02*3 Normal : : Normal Day DISA IRNA to BV*2 Night Lunch
Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored BV20*3 : : BV21*3 : : Not Stored : :
Not Stored Not Stored Not Stored
CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416] DISA IRNA to BVDay/Night/Lunch [438-440] Note This feature functions only when "DISA" is selected as the distribution method for the corresponding outside (CO) line port.
*3 BVxx (xx=0124): Common BV OGM number followed by the Common BV OGM feature number "722" In this example: If an outside (CO) line call is received on outside (CO) line 1:
a) In day mode: The common BV OGM to be played ("BV01") for BV distribution is assigned.
The caller hears the specified common BV OGM and leaves a voice message in the common message area.
b) In night/lunch mode: The common BV OGM to be played ("BV02") for BV distribution is

assigned. The caller hears the specified common BV OGM and leaves a voice message in the common message area. If an outside (CO) line call is received on outside (CO) line 2:
a) In day mode: The DISA OGM to be played ("DISA OGM3") for DISA distribution and the
common BV OGM to be played ("BV20") for DISA IRNA to BV are assigned. The call arrives on a DISA line and the caller hears the specified DISA OGM. When the destination does not answer the DISA call, the call is redirected to the common message area via Intercept Routing. The caller hears the specified common BV OGM and leaves a voice message in the common message area.
116
Feature Guide
b) In night mode: The DISA OGM to be played ("DISA OGM4") for DISA distribution and the
common BV OGM to be played ("BV21") for DISA IRNA to BV are assigned. The call arrives on a DISA line and the caller hears the specified DISA OGM. When the destination does not answer the DISA call, the call is redirected to the common message area via Intercept Routing. The caller hears the specified common BV OGM and leaves a voice message in the common message area. An extension user can set incoming calls to be forwarded to his or her personal message area, when he or she cannot answer them. If an incoming call, direct to the user's extension, or a call using the DISA AA service ( CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416]), is forwarded to the user's personal message area, the caller will hear a personal BV OGM and can leave a voice message. Direct Message feature An extension user can leave a voice message directly in the personal message area of another extension, even if the extension has not been set to forward incoming calls to its personal message area, or even if no personal/common BV OGM has been recorded. When a caller leaves a voice message using this feature, the voice message is automatically linked to the Caller ID information recorded in the corresponding call log. An extension user can play and/or erase voice messages from the user's extension. In addition, the user can remotely play and/or erase voice messages through an outside (CO) line. The user accesses the relevant voice message area by entering a preprogrammed voice message access code ( BV Access Code through CO Line [625]) while hearing a personal/common BV OGM or DISA OGM.
Note If the Voice Mail Integration feature has been set, the BV feature will not function.
Conditions
Hardware Requirement: An optional voice message card. The BV feature does not use OGMs for DISA/Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) on either the preinstalled DISA/UCD OGM card or the optional message expansion card for DISA/UCD OGMs (if present) ( 1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD). When an extension that belongs to BV resource 1 or BV resource 2 is reassigned to the other resource, the voice messages that were recorded prior to reassignment are erased, but the personal/common BV OGMs are not erased. Each resource can only be accessed by one extension at a time. When the resource an extension is assigned to is being used by another extension, the extension cannot use that resource, even if the other resource is available. The PBX can record a maximum of 125 voice messages per resource. The maximum recording time of each voice message ( BV Recording Time [214]) and the total recording time of the PBX ( BV Total Recording Time [807]) are programmable. The maximum recording time of each personal/ common BV OGM ( Common/Personal BV OGM Recording Time [215]) is also programmable. System programming determines the extension users that can use this feature ( BV for Extension [622]). If a voice message channel (resource) is in use when an outside caller tries to leave a voice message, he or she will hear a ringback tone. The caller will hear a personal/common BV OGM as soon as a channel becomes available. Up to 8 outside (CO) line calls can be placed in a queue as they arrive. If a user performs System Data Clear by selecting "All para" through system programming ( System Data Clear [999]), all voice messages except for personal/common BV OGMs are erased. To erase all voice messages and personal/common BV OGMs at once, initialise the voice message card through system programming ( BV Card Initialisation [808]). When the voice message card is initialised, the PBX is reset.
Feature Guide
117
Even if no flexible CO button is assigned as a Caller ID IndicationPersonal button or a Caller ID IndicationCommon button, a caller can leave a voice message in that personal/common message area and the Caller ID information, including associated voice messages will be logged. When the remaining recording time for the PBX is less than 5 minutes, the display informs both the extension users within the same resource and the manager that the voice message resource is full, and the users will hear a special dial tone (dial tone 5) when going off-hook. If the remaining recording time goes back to being 5 minutes or more, for example, when messages are erased, the display returns to the idle status display and the users will hear a normal dial tone (dial tone 1) instead of dial tone 5 when going off-hook. If the FWD feature is enabled for an extension whose FWD destination is the BV feature number ( Call Forwarding Selection [963]), outside (CO) line calls to the extension will not be forwarded and the extension will not ring, even if the user has set the FWD feature. If FWD is disabled, outside (CO) line calls to the extension will not be forwarded and the extension will ring. Only the operator or the manager can access the common message area (including common BV OGM). The operator has higher priority than the manager as follows: When the operator extension is reassigned, the common voice messages (except for the personal BV OGM of the operator) that were recorded prior to reassignment are erased. The new operator can record, play back, and erase the common BV OGM. When the operator, who does not share an extension number with the manager, is newly assigned, the common voice messages (except for the personal BV OGM of the manager) that were recorded prior to reassignment are erased. The operator can record, play back, and erase the common BV OGM. When the operator, who does not share an extension number with the manager, is deleted, the common voice messages (except for the personal BV OGM of the operator) that were recorded prior to reassignment are erased. In this case, the manager can record, play back, and erase the common BV OGM. A voice message area cannot be included as a member of a conference call. Even if a caller does not leave a voice message in either the personal or common message area, for example, by going on-hook while hearing a personal/common BV OGM, the information is still logged in the corresponding Incoming Call Log (common or personal area) and displayed by SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)). Personal/Common BV OGM Mute Time Certain DTMF signals, such as Caller ID information, may be sent from the telephone company when a call is first connected. Because these signals may interfere with BV, the PBX can be programmed to ignore DTMF signals for a specified amount of time ( OGM Mute Time [519]) after a call is connected. After the Personal/Common BV OGM Mute Time passes, DTMF signals are recognised by the PBX and the personal/common BV OGM begins playing.

2.3.8 2-Channel Voice Message Card (KX-TE82492)

1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

1.5.5 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Voice Message [BV]) 2.1.6 Recording, Playing, or Erasing Common BV Outgoing Messages
118
Feature Guide
1.16 Caller ID Features

1.16.1 Caller ID
Description
The PBX can receive Caller ID information (telephone numbers and callers' names) from calls received on outside (CO) lines. This information can be shown on the displays of proprietary telephones (PTs) as well as some single line telephones (SLTs) when receiving calls. Additionally, Caller ID information is logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension that received the call, allowing the caller to view a record of incoming calls or make a call to a person in the call log later. The PBX can be programmed to modify a caller's telephone number when it is received by, for example, adding an Outside (CO) Line Access number or adding/deleting certain digits of incoming telephone numbers automatically. This allows an extension user to make a call later to a telephone number logged in his or her call log without worrying about Outside (CO) Line Access numbers, area codes, etc. Notes
The term "Caller ID" used in this Feature Guide refers to features that can receive caller information sent from the telephone company and received on outside (CO) lines. Your network provider may use a different name for this type of service. To receive Caller ID information, you must subscribe to the telephone company's Caller ID service and enable Caller ID for the appropriate outside (CO) lines through system programming ( Caller ID [900]). Caller ID signalling type, FSK (Bell 202 or V.23) or DTMF, can be selected to match the type used by your telephone company through system programming ( Caller ID Type [910]).
Caller ID Display on SLT This feature is available only for SLTs compatible with either FSK-type Caller ID or DTMF (Dual Tone MultiFrequency)-type Caller ID. Notes
This feature complies with ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute)-type FSK and Bellcore-type FSK. This feature does not comply with methods using DT-AS signal or line reversal signal.
1. Caller ID-Related Feature

Feature Incoming Call Log Description Details in
Caller ID information is automatically recorded in 1.16.2 Incoming the call log of the extension that received the call. Call Log This information can be used to view a record of incoming calls or make calls to any number in the call log.
2. Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition

When a call containing Caller ID information is received, the PBX can add "0"*1 to the caller's telephone number as a leading number if it does not begin with "0", through system programming ( Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition [905]).
*1
For New Zealand, "0" can be added to the received telephone number when the maximum length of a telephone number is 8 or 9 digits, and "00" can be added to the received telephone number when the maximum length is 10 digits or more.
Feature Guide
119
3. Automatic Caller ID Number Modification

When Caller ID information is checked, the PBX can automatically modify the caller's telephone number according to a preprogrammed set of rules (Caller ID Modification Table). This modified number allows the extension user to make a call to this number later without worrying about Outside (CO) Line Access numbers, area codes, etc. [Programming Example: Caller ID Modification Table] Call Type Local Call*2 Code No. 1 2 : 5 Long-distance Call*3 *1 *2 *3 [Not programmable] 0 1 Area Code*1 212 011 : Removed No. of Digits 3 3 : Added No. Not Stored 001 :
Caller ID Area Code [901] Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902] Caller ID Modification for Long-distance Calls [903]
120
Feature Guide
<Modification Flowchart>
An outside (CO) line call containing Caller ID information is received.
Yes
Is the caller's area code stored in the Caller ID Modification Table?
No
Modifies the number according to the method programmed in the corresponding "Local Call" field. Example: Removed number of digits: 3 Added number: blank Example: Received number: 201 555 1234
Modifies the number according to the method programmed in the "Long-distance Call" field. Example: Removed number of digits: 0 Added number: 1 Example: Received number: 313 555 1234
Modified number:
555 1234
Modified number:
1 313 555 1234
Modification is complete. Modified number is logged.
Modification is complete. Modified number is logged.
4. Displaying the Caller's Name

When a call containing Caller ID information is received, the PBX will search for the caller's name in the following order, then show that name on the display.
1) The System Speed Dialling Table 2) The Caller ID information received from the telephone company
If a caller's name is not stored in the PBX or sent from the telephone company, it will not be displayed.
Conditions
[General]
Hardware Requirement: An optional Caller ID card.
[Caller ID Display on SLT]

Caller ID Display on SLT feature applies to: Intercom calls and outside (CO) line calls. Intercom calls include forwarded calls, calls from Transfer Recall and Hold Recall. Outside (CO) line calls include calls directed to Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) or Direct Inward System
Feature Guide
121
Access (DISA) ring groups, forwarded calls, intercepted calls, or calls from extensions that placed outside (CO) line calls on consultation hold. SLT Caller ID signalling type can be selected through system programming ( SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150]). Each SLT (including an SLT connected in parallel with a PT) can be programmed to receive Caller ID information through system programming ( SLT Caller ID [628]). When the caller's telephone number is sent to an SLT, an Outside (CO) Line Access number can be automatically added to the telephone number through system programming ( SLT Caller ID Line Access Number [151]), to be used when calling the caller back. If a call is transferred, forwarded, or intercepted via Intercept Routing to an SLT, the original caller's information will be shown on the SLT. During a conversation, Caller ID information will not be shown on the SLT. When FSK-type Caller ID information is received, the caller's telephone number (max. 20 digits), name (max. 16 characters), date and time, or the reason for nondisplay of Caller ID information such as "Private", "Out of Area", or "Long Distance" will be shown on the SLT. If the caller's telephone number exceeds 20 digits, the SLT receives only the first 20 digits. If the caller's name exceeds 16 characters, the SLT receives only the first 16 characters. When DTMF-type Caller ID information is received, the caller's telephone number (max. 16 digits) or the reason for nondisplay of Caller ID information will be shown on the SLT. If the caller's telephone number exceeds 16 digits, the SLT receives only the first 16 digits. However, when a value less than "1500 ms" is set through system programming ( SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143]), the SLT receives only the first 10 digits. Depending on the type of SLT being used, caller names and the dates and times that calls were received may not be able to be shown on the SLT. If an outside caller disconnects a call to an SLT on which the call's Caller ID information is displayed, and the SLT receives another outside (CO) line call directly after, the SLT will wait until a preprogrammed time has passed ( SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call [627]) before it starts to ring, and the new caller's Caller ID information will be shown on the SLT. A received call can be answered even if it is not yet ringing, but Caller ID information will not be shown on the SLT. A certain amount of time may be required between calls for an SLT to receive Caller ID information correctly. To enable the Caller ID feature, it may be necessary to set the same ring tone pattern ( SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629]) as used by the telephone company.

2.3.5 3-Port Caller ID Card (KX-TE82493)

1.6.1.5 Speed DiallingPersonal/System 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
122
Feature Guide
1.16.2 Incoming Call Log

Description
When a call containing Caller ID information is received by an extension, the information is shown on the telephone display, notifying the extension user of the caller's identity. This information is also automatically logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension, and can be viewed later or used to call that caller back. There are 2 types of call log areas available in the PBX. One is the personal area, which stores logs of calls received by each extension when a call arrives at a certain proprietary telephone (PT). The other is the common area, which stores a log of calls arriving at multiple PTs or via the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Intercept Routing feature. Caller ID information can be logged by the following methods: Logged automatically when no one answers calls. Logged automatically if an extension user presets logging of the caller's information when answering calls. Logged manually by pressing the Caller ID Indication button during a conversation. Logged automatically when a caller leaves a voice message ( 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)) [Example]
If the information is stored in record "002", 002: 0011223344 --- Caller's number --- Caller's name New:002 Old:001 --- Status* & number of logged calls
002:JOHN WHITE
002: May15 10:23A --- Date and time of call
Caller ID Indication buttons

Personal Common
Caller ID Selection buttons

Personal Common
* "New" is displayed for call records that have not previously been viewed; "Old" is displayed for call records that have previously been viewed. Both new and old call records are stored in each personal and common area.
Conditions
Caller ID IndicationPersonal/Common Button A flexible CO button can be customised as a Caller ID IndicationPersonal/Common button, and will indicate the status of the Incoming Call Log for the extension, as shown below. Light pattern Red on Off Status of the corresponding call log There are new call records since the last time the call log was viewed. There are no new call records in the call log, or the call log has been already viewed.
Feature Guide
123
The Caller ID IndicationPersonal/Common button will alert an extension user to any missed (unanswered) calls. The Caller ID IndicationPersonal/Common button is also used to store the information of an incoming call during a conversation, and to view caller information while on-hook and then call back a caller. If a Caller ID IndicationCommon button is not assigned to any PT, the calls will be logged in the personal area of the PT that is connected to the lowest-numbered jack, and its Caller ID Indication Personal button light will turn red. Caller ID SelectionPersonal/Common Button A flexible CO button can be customised as a Caller ID SelectionPersonal/Common button. The Caller ID SelectionPersonal/Common button is used to display the number of logged calls while on-hook, to display and cycle through the information of an incoming call during a conversation, while receiving a call, or while viewing caller information, and to inform an extension user that the personal or common area call log is full. The user may also change the displayed information by pressing the "#" key instead of the Caller ID SelectionPersonal/Common button while receiving a call, or while viewing caller information. It is programmable whether the user can view call logs stored in the common area or not ( Common Area Call Log Check [909]). If this programme is enabled, the Caller ID IndicationCommon button and Caller ID SelectionCommon button can be assigned. Incoming Call Log Memory The total number of incoming calls that can be logged by the PBX is limited ( 4.1.1 Capacity of System Resources). When a call log is full (personal area: 20 calls, common area: 300 calls), the Caller ID SelectionPersonal/Common button light will turn red. When a caller leaves a voice message, it is automatically linked to the Caller ID information in the Incoming Call Log. Up to 125 voice messages per BV resource are stored separately from the Incoming Call Logs mentioned above. It is possible for an extension user (or the operator/manager) to select whether the oldest call in the personal area (or common area) will be replaced each time a call is received, or whether the new call information will be discarded, by entering the 21st Incoming Call Logged in the Personal Area (or 301st Incoming Call Logged in the Common Area) feature number. Caller records for all call logs of an extension are numbered sequentially as they are received, regardless of which call log the information is stored in. For example, information on the first call received will be stored as record "001" (e.g., 001, logged in the personal area) and information on the second call received will be stored as record "002" (e.g., 002, logged in the common area), whether it is logged in the personal area, common area, or BV. If the call log in the personal area becomes full when the 21st call (e.g., 110, logged in the personal area) has been set to overwrite the oldest call (001, logged in the personal area), The oldest call will be deleted and subsequent records will be moved one number down, if the 21st call is unanswered or if it is answered but has different information from the 20th call. The 21st call will be discarded and the previous call information will stay as it is, if the 21st call is answered and has the same information as the 20th call. Common area call logs function in the same way. If a transferred call (unscreened) is not answered, the information is logged in the personal area of the final destination. Regardless of the telephone type being used, the recorded voice message is associated with the caller's information. Even if no flexible CO button is assigned as a Caller ID IndicationPersonal button or a Caller ID IndicationCommon button, a caller can leave a voice message in that personal/common message area and the Caller ID information, including associated voice messages will be logged. Incoming Call Log Display Lock An extension user can lock the Incoming Call Log (including associated voice messages) stored in his or her personal area, preventing other users from viewing its contents ( 1.8.3 Extension Lock). The operator or manager can cancel the lock in the case that the extension user forgets the lock code.
124
Feature Guide
The Incoming Call Log for the common area can only be locked or unlocked by the operator and manager. Automatic Caller ID Number Modification If the PBX is programmed to automatically modify incoming telephone numbers, the modified numbers will be displayed when Caller ID information is checked. Extension users can also modify the incoming telephone numbers manually. Initial Display Selection If the Caller ID service provides both the number and name, the user can select which is shown first on the display of the PT through system programming ( Caller ID Log Priority [904]). While a user is viewing his or her extension's Incoming Call Log, if the caller whose information is being viewed also left a voice message, the Message/Ringer Lamp or the MESSAGE button light will turn on. The associated voice messages in that personal/common message area can be played or erased with the MESSAGE button or the TRANSFER button respectively. Even if there are message waiting indications left at a user's extension, the Message/Ringer Lamp or the MESSAGE button light that displays notifications from the Message Waiting feature ( 1.17.1 Message Waiting) turns off while the user is viewing his or her extension's Incoming Call Log with the Caller ID IndicationPersonal/Common button. If a user erases voice messages by any method (for example, by using BV or performing System Data Clear), the caller's information is erased from the extension's Incoming Call Log simultaneously. Even if a caller does not leave a voice message, for example, by going on-hook while hearing a personal/common BV outgoing message (OGM), the information is logged in the corresponding Incoming Call Log (common or personal area). During a conversation with an extension or outside party, an extension user can transfer the call to another extension that has set incoming calls to be forwarded to that extension's personal message area, or can transfer the call to the personal message area using the Direct Message feature of BV. If the transferring user performs Call Transfer with Announcement, there is a chance that both parties may be recorded in the same message. In this case, the information of the last extension or outside party that recorded the message is logged in the corresponding Incoming Call Log (personal area).

1.16.1 Caller ID 1.18.2 Flexible Buttons

1.9.1 Calling with the Incoming Call Log 2.1.4 Erasing All Caller Information in the Common Area (Incoming Call Log in the Common AreaCLEAR ALL) 2.1.5 Disregarding the Newest Call or Overwriting the Oldest Call in the Common Area Call Log (301st Incoming Call Logged in the Common Area)
Feature Guide
125
1.17 Message Features

1.17.1 Message Waiting
Description
When an extension user calls another extension user who does not answer the call, he or she can leave a message waiting indication. The appropriate button or lamp on the called extension user's telephone will light, indicating that a call was missed, or a message recorded by the Voice Processing System (VPS) or Built-in Voice Message (BV) feature is waiting. A MESSAGE button can be used to call the caller back or listen to the message. When a message is left for a proprietary telephone (PT), the MESSAGE button on it lights, or the Message/ Ringer Lamp turns red. Pressing the lit MESSAGE button while on-hook shows the caller's information as shown below: [Example]
105:Tom Smith --- Extension no. and name of the person who left the message
Message/Message for another extension buttons

This extension Other extension*
* This button is useful when, for example, the manager checks messages left for another extension.
Conditions
System programming determines the single line telephones (SLTs) that can receive the message waiting notifications left by another extension ( SLT Message Waiting [619]). If a user goes off-hook with an SLT that has messages waiting, a special dial tone (dial tone 3) will be heard. The user can call a caller back or listen to the message by entering the Message Waiting Answer feature number. Message for another extension Button A flexible CO/Direct Station Selection (DSS) button can be customised as a Message for another extension button. This button can be used on a PT that is allowed through system programming ( Message Waiting for Another Extension [618]) to access messages left for another extension. Message Waiting for Another Extension Lock An extension user can lock or unlock message waiting indications to prevent others from viewing, calling back or clearing message waiting indications left at his or her extension. The operator and manager can override this lock to unlock it (Extension LockCANCEL ALL). Even while this lock is on, the user can view, call back, or clear message waiting indications left at his or her own extension. Both the calling extension and the called extension can cancel a notification after it has been left. Message waiting indications are always left on the originally called extension. Message waiting indications cannot be sent to an FWD destination ( 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)) or an idle extension hunting destination ( 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting).
126
Feature Guide
A message waiting indication is automatically cleared when the called extension calls the caller back and the call is answered. Message Waiting Indication via Voice Mail APT Integration If a voice message is left for the called extension, it can be heard by following the Voice Mail prompts after pressing the lit MESSAGE button ( 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration). Message Waiting Indication via BV If a voice message is left in the user's personal message area or the common message area, it can be played back with the lit MESSAGE button by the user or the operator/manager respectively ( 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)). It is possible to activate the Message/Ringer Lamp ( KX-T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control [968]) on the KX-T7700 series telephones for the following incoming calls: Incoming call from an outside (CO) line with Caller ID information Incoming call from another extension to a busy extension when the called extension has set Call Waiting (Call Waiting Tone 1) Incoming call from a doorphone when an optional doorphone or doorbell/door chime is connected to the PBX


1.2.4 When the Dialled Party is Busy or There is No Answer 1.5.5 Using Voice Messaging (Built-in Voice Message [BV]) 1.8.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
Feature Guide
127
1.17.2 Absent Message

Description
Extension users can prepare a brief text message (Absent Message) that will be displayed to other extension users when they are called. This message can explain the reason for their absence, and can be used by any extension user. The following Absent Messages may be programmed: Message No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Will Return Soon Gone Home At Ext %%% (Extension Number) Back at %%:%% (Hour:Minute) AM (or PM) Out Until %%/%% (Month/Day) In a Meeting Message
Note The "%" shown above indicates a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at an individual extension.
Conditions
An extension user can select only one Absent Message at a time. The selected message is displayed at the extension every time the user goes off-hook. The caller must be using a display proprietary telephone (PT) to see the Absent Message.

1.5.2 Showing a Message on the Caller's Telephone Display (Absent Message)
128
Feature Guide
1.17.3 Call Routing for Fixed Line SMS

Description
When outside (CO) line calls are received from a Short Message Service (SMS) centre, the PBX can route incoming calls to specific single line telephones (SLTs) that support SMS according to a preprogrammed set of rules (SMS Routing Table). Fixed Line SMS is a service that allows text messages to be sent and received via Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) access. If a user subscribes to his or her telephone company's Caller ID service and the PBX receives an SMS centre call from the registered SMS centre number, the PBX will relay the text message to the SLT. In all other cases, incoming outside (CO) line calls will be directed according to system programming ( CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416]). To make or receive SMS centre calls using fixed lines, the PBX and specific SLTs must be programmed so they will know how to handle those calls. To programme SLTs, refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with the SLTs. [Programming Example: SMS Routing Table with Sub-address Numbers] When the SMS centre number used to receive SMS centre calls is "1112224444" and the telephone numbers of each outside (CO) line are "3847001" for CO 1/2 and "3847002" for CO 3, programme as follows:
1) PBX setting
SMS Centre Number for Receiving*1: 1112224444 Location No. 1 2 (Cont.) : : 8 *1 *2 *3 Outside (CO) Line No.*2 CO 1, CO 2 CO 3 : : Not Stored Extension Jack No.*3 Jack 01, Jack 02, Jack 03 Jack 10, Jack 11 : : Not Stored
SMS Centre Number for Receiving [145] SMS Routing TableCO [146] SMS Routing TableExtension [147]
If the SMS centre supports sub-address numbers, up to 8 SLTs can be assigned as the SMS destination for each location. One location can be used for each outside (CO) line telephone number.
Feature Guide
129
2) SLT setting
Extension Jack No. Jack 01 Jack 02 Jack 10 (Cont.) : : * SMS Centre Number for SMS Centre Number for Sending Receiving 89* 1112223333 89* 1112223333 89* 1112223333 : : 1112224444 1112224444 1112224444 : : SMS Subaddress 1 2 1 : :
89: Outside (CO) Line Access number used to make SMS centre calls using the fixed outside (CO) lines. When the SMS centre can receive an SMS message from any telephone number, the Automatic Line Access number or Outside (CO) Line Access number can also be used respectively.
In this example:
a) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 01, enter "38470011" as
the destination.
b) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 02, enter "38470012" as
the destination.
c) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 10, enter "38470021" as
the destination. [Programming Example: SMS Routing Table without Sub-address Numbers] When the SMS centre number used to receive SMS centre calls is "1112224444" and the telephone numbers of each outside (CO) line are "3847001" for CO 1, "3847002" for CO 2, and "3847003" for CO 8, programme as follows:
1) PBX setting
SMS Centre Number for Receiving: 1112224444 Location No. 1 2 (Cont.) : : 8 Outside (CO) Line No. CO 1 CO 2 : : CO 8 Extension Jack No. Jack 01 Jack 02 : : Jack 08
If the SMS centre does not support sub-address numbers, only one SLT can be assigned for each location. One location can be used for each outside (CO) line telephone number.
130
Feature Guide
2) SLT setting
Extension Jack No. Jack 01 Jack 02 Jack 08 (Cont.) : : In this example: SMS Centre Number for SMS Centre Number for Sending Receiving 89 1112223333 89 1112223333 89 1112223333 : : 1112224444 1112224444 1112224444 : : SMS Subaddress : :
a) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 01, enter "3847001" as the
destination.
b) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 02, enter "3847002" as the
destination.
c) To send an SMS message to the SLT connected to extension jack 08, enter "3847003" as the
destination.
Conditions
Hardware Requirement: An optional Caller ID card. The PBX relays text messages from the SMS centre to SMS-enabled SLTs, and vice versa. To receive SMS information, you must subscribe to the telephone company's Caller ID service and enable Caller ID for the appropriate outside (CO) lines through system programming ( Caller ID [900]). Each SMS-enabled SLT must be programmed to receive Caller ID information through system programming ( SLT Caller ID [628]). If an SLT user sets the Automatic Callback Busy feature by dialling "6" because the selected line is busy when he or she tries to send a text message, the SLT will ring when the line becomes idle. To send the text message, the user must answer the callback ring, go on-hook, and then make an SMS centre call again. When a call is received on one of the outside (CO) lines preprogrammed in an SMS Routing Table, the destination SLT may ring one time. If a user wants to receive SMS messages on an SLT, it is recommended to not connect a proprietary telephone (PT) in parallel. If the PT user answers the call, the SMS message will not be received. When an SMS centre call is received at an SLT that has set the Call Forwarding (FWD) feature, the FWD feature will not function and the SMS message is received by that SLT. When an SLT user makes an SMS centre call, in some cases the duration of the call may not be verified with SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)), because it takes very little time to send SMS messages. To verify the duration of these calls, it is recommended to set the start timer of call duration to "5 s" or "Instantly" through system programming ( Call Duration Counter Start [204]). When a user on an SLT that is in "TONE (DTMF)" mode makes an SMS call using outside (CO) lines set to "Pulse" or "Call Block" mode through system programming ( Dial Mode [401]), if the SMS centre number is longer than supported, for example 16 digits, the SMS call may not be completed. In this case, set the dialling mode of the SLT to "PULSE" mode using the switch.
Feature Guide
131

2.3.5 3-Port Caller ID Card (KX-TE82493)
132
Feature Guide
1.18 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features

1.18.1 Fixed Buttons
Description
Proprietary telephones (PTs) and Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles feature a wide variety of feature buttons and Line Access buttons, explained below. Note that certain models do not have certain buttons. For a description of the buttons found on each PT or DSS Console, please refer to the Operating Instructions for each PT or DSS Console. [PT] Button Navigator Key, Volume Key PROGRAM FLASH/RECALL Function Used to adjust the volume of the speaker, handset and headset, and the display contrast, or to select desired items. Used to enter and exit programming mode. Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up (Flash/Recall mode), or to send an EFA (External Feature Access) signal to the telephone company or host PBX to access external features (EFA mode). Used to place a call on hold. Used to select handset or hands-free operation. Used to select hands-free dialling and monitor operation. Used to leave a message waiting indication, call back the party who left a message waiting indication, or play back voice messages. This button is provided with an LED (Light Emitting Diode), except for on KX-T7700 series telephones. With KX-T7700 series telephones, the Message/Ringer Lamp is lit when a message waiting indication is left at an extension. Used to redial the last number dialled. Used to transfer a call to another party. Used to access an outside (CO) line (or outside (CO) line group) when making or receiving a call. The button's preprogrammed Outside (CO) Line Access method determines which line is selected (Default: Single-CO [S-CO]). Can also be customised as a feature button. Used to make or receive intercom calls. Used to answer an intercom call automatically in hands-free mode, or to mute the built-in microphone during a conversation. Used to answer an intercom call automatically. Used for System Speed Dialling/Saved Number Redial, playing back personal/ common BV outgoing messages (OGMs) used by the Built-in Voice Message (BV) feature, and storing programme changes.
HOLD SP-PHONE (Speakerphone) MONITOR MESSAGE
REDIAL TRANSFER Flexible CO
INTERCOM AUTO ANS (Auto Answer)/MUTE VOICE CALL AUTO DIAL/STORE
Feature Guide
133
Button CONF (Conference) FWD/DND (Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb) PAUSE PF (Programmable Feature)
Function Used to establish a 3-party or 5-party conference call. Used to set the FWD or DND feature for the extension.
Used to insert a dialling pause in a stored number. Used to access a preprogrammed feature (no default). Mostly used as a Onetouch Dialling button.
[DSS Console] Button Flexible DSS Usage Used to call an extension with a one-touch operation. Each button is programmed to correspond to an extension. DSS buttons can also be customised as different feature buttons. Used to access a preprogrammed feature (no default). Mostly used as a Onetouch Dialling button.
PF
Conditions
Certain buttons are equipped with a light to indicate the status of the corresponding line or feature.

1.1.1 Before Operating a Telephone
134
Feature Guide

Description
Flexible buttons are buttons whose functions can be customised through either system or personal programming. The following types of flexible buttons are found on proprietary telephones (PTs) and/or Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles:
a) b) c) d)
Flexible CO buttons Flexible DSS buttons Programmable Feature (PF) buttons Flexible MESSAGE button
[Button Usage] Button Single-CO (S-CO) Group-CO (G-CO) Function Used to access a specified outside (CO) line for making or receiving calls ( 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access). Used to access an idle outside (CO) line in a specified outside (CO) line group for making calls. Incoming calls from outside (CO) lines in the assigned outside (CO) line group arrive at this button ( 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access). Used to access an idle outside (CO) line for making calls. Incoming calls from the assigned outside (CO) lines, which are not assigned to S-CO or G-CO buttons, arrive at this button ( 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access). Used to call an extension with a one-touch operation ( 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call).
Other-CO (O-CO)
Direct Station Selection (DSS) One-touch Dialling Message
Used to call a preprogrammed party or access a feature with a one-touch operation ( 1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling). Used to leave a message waiting indication, call back the party who left the message waiting indication, or play back voice messages ( 1.17.1 Message Waiting). Used to access voice messages stored for another extension ( Message Waiting). 1.17.1
Message for another extension FWD/DND (Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb) Save
Used to set the FWD or DND feature for the extension ( 1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)OVERVIEW). Used to store a telephone number while in a conversation with an outside party or while hearing a busy tone, and then easily redial the number later ( 1.6.1.4 Redial). Used to establish a 3-party or 5-party conference call ( 1.13.1.2 Conference).
Conference Caller ID Indication Personal
Used to inform an extension user of calls logged in his or her personal area, store the information of an incoming call during a conversation, and view caller information while on-hook and then call back a caller ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log).
Feature Guide
135
Button Caller ID Selection Personal
Function Used to display and cycle through the information of an incoming call during a conversation, while receiving a call, or while viewing caller information, display the number of logged calls while on-hook, and inform an extension user that the personal area call log is full ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log). Used to inform an extension user of calls logged in the common area, store the information of an incoming call during a conversation, and view caller information while on-hook and then call back a caller ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log). Used to display and cycle through the information of an incoming call during a conversation, while receiving a call, or while viewing caller information, display the number of logged calls while on-hook, and inform an extension user that the common area call log is full ( 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log). Used to switch between Log-in and Log-out status ( Used to change the time service mode to day mode ( Used to change the time service mode to night mode ( Used to change the time service mode to lunch mode ( Used to remotely lock or unlock another extension ( Features). 1.2.4 Log-in/Log-out). 2.2.3 Time Service). 2.2.3 Time Service). 2.2.3 Time Service).
Caller ID Indication Common
Caller ID Selection Common
Log-in/Log-out Day Night Lunch Extension Lock 2-way Record 2-way Transfer Live Call Screening (LCS) LCS Cancel
2.2.4 Operator/Manager 1.19.1 Voice Mail
Used to record a conversation into the user's own mailbox ( APT Integration).
Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension ( 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration). Used to listen while a caller is leaving a message in the user's voice mailbox and, if desired, intercept the call ( 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration). Used to stop monitoring the user's own voice mailbox while a caller is leaving a message, or stop the alert tone heard in private mode while a caller is leaving a message ( 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration). Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension ( Mail APT Integration). 1.19.1 Voice
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer
Conditions
Extension button confirmation A display PT user can confirm the button settings, such as the flexible CO button, by pressing the corresponding button while on-hook. The Day, Night, Lunch, and Extension Lock buttons can only be assigned to flexible DSS buttons at an extension assigned as the operator or manager.

3.1.3 Customising the Buttons
136
Feature Guide
1.18.3 LED Indication

Description
The LED (Light Emitting Diode) of the Message/Ringer Lamp and the following buttons (Line Status Buttons and Corresponding Extension Status Button) can indicate line status with a variety of light patterns. Line Status Buttons: Single-CO (S-CO), Group-CO (G-CO), Other-CO (O-CO), INTERCOM Corresponding Extension Status Button: Direct Station Selection (DSS)
1. Light Pattern of the Message/Ringer Lamp

Incoming call from an outside (CO) line/another extension: Red flashing Message(s) present (no incoming call): Red on No messages present and no incoming call: Off
2. Light Pattern of the Line Status Buttons

Line Status Button Light Pattern Off Green on Slow green flashing Moderate speed green flashing Rapid green flashing Red on Slow red flashing Rapid red flashing Another extension is holding the line. S-CO Outside (CO) Line Status G-CO Idle This extension is using the line. This extension is holding the line. This extension is holding the line using Exclusive Call Hold or using the line for an unattended conference. O-CO Intercom Line Status INTERCOM
Line(s) in use
Incoming call
Incoming call
Feature Guide
137
3. Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button

Corresponding Extension Status Button Light Pattern Off Slow red flashing Moderate-speed red flashing Red on Idle Call Forwarding (FWD)* Do Not Disturb (DND)* Busy
DSS Lamp Mode [112]).
DSS
* This setting can be changed through system programming (
4. Flashing Light Patterns

1s Slow Flashing
Moderate Flashing
Rapid Flashing
Conditions
Incoming outside (CO) line calls arrive on available buttons in the following priority: S-CO G-CO O-CO

1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) 1.12.1 Call Hold 1.13.1.2 Conference
138
Feature Guide
1.18.4 Display Information

Description
A display proprietary telephone (PT) can relay the following information to the user while making or receiving calls: Display Item The extension number and name of the calling or called extension The status of the called extension Display Example 123: Tom Smith 123: Busy Condition
The name and number of the doorphone Door Phone 1 The telephone number dialled The extension number and name of the calling extension after the call is forwarded The received call information a) Caller's name b) Caller's number c) Outside (CO) line number ABC Company 12345678 Call on CO 1 1234567890 102:Mike
The first line message can be either (a) or (b) at each extension through system programming ( Caller ID Log Priority [904]).
Duration of the current outside (CO) line CO 1 0:01'15 call
Conditions
Display Contrast The display contrast can be adjusted with the Navigator key or the CONTRAST selector. This is available only for PTs. Ringer Volume The volume of the ringer can be adjusted with the RINGER Volume selector. Self-extension Number A display PT user can confirm his or her own jack number and extension number on the display. Characters (name) or digits (number) exceeding the maximum length of the display are not displayed. Although in this case information may not be displayed properly, the received information is not altered. When the information displayed by pressing specific buttons (One-touch Dialling, REDIAL, Save) while on-hook exceeds 17 characters, the "&" mark will be shown on the right side of the display.

Feature Guide
139
1.19 Voice Mail Features

1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration
Description
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) that supports APT Integration can provide many features and conveniences that are unachievable using traditional voice mail systems that rely on Inband (DTMF) Integration. Many of these features are explained below. For more information, refer to the Installation Manual supplied with the Panasonic VPS.
1. Automatic ConfigurationQuick Setup (or DIP switch initialisation without a PC)

The PBX shares information with the VPS during setup that allows the VPS to automatically create the appropriate mailboxes for all extension numbers. The following settings to enable APT Integration must be programmed through system programming to match the settings of the VPS. When 2 VPSs are connected to the PBX, note that each extension can have only one mailbox, but when the VPSs have executed Automatic Configuration, an extension has a mailbox in both VPSs. Therefore, an extension user must delete a mailbox in either VPS so that there are no duplicates.
Extension group 7 VPS
7 8
Port 1 Port 2 VPS
PBX
15 16
Port 1 Port 2
Extension group 8
This example uses a Panasonic KX-TVP50 series VPS, which can be connected with 4-conductor wire to 4 extension jacks of the PBX. [Programming Example: Voice Mail Table] APT Integration Enable *1 *2 VM 1 APT Port [130] VM 2 APT Port [131] VM 1 APT Port*1 Port 7 & 8 VM 2 APT Port*2 Port 15 & 16
In this example: When "Port 7 & 8" is selected for VPS1, extension jacks 07 and 08 are placed in extension group 7 automatically. Likewise, when "Port 15 & 16" is selected for VPS2, extension jacks 15 and 16 are placed in extension group 8 automatically. Each extension group can be connected to only one VPS. Also the
140
Feature Guide
idle extension hunting type is set as Circular Hunting, and the Voice Mail (VM) Hunting Chain and Automated Attendant (AA) Hunting Chain are automatically enabled in each of these 2 extension groups.
2. AA Service
Allows the VPS to answer calls and direct callers to dial a number in order to connect themselves to the desired party (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the desired party."). It is possible to access VM service from AA service to, for example, record messages.
3. VM Service
Allows callers to leave voice messages for specific parties, such as an extension user. Extension users can then listen to the messages left in their mailboxes at their convenience.
AA Service
A VPS can be used for the AA service as well as the VM service. When a call is directed to a port of the VPS that is in AA service mode, the caller will hear an outgoing message (OGM). After or while listening to the OGM, the caller may dial an extension number as directed (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the desired party.").
1. AA to Extension
AA receives and answers outside (CO) line calls and offers services such as transferring to an extension or mailbox using DTMF signalling from the calling party.
Outside (CO) Line Call
DIL
PBX
VPS Extension
Transfer
AA 1
AA 2 AA Hunting Chain
Busy/No Answer (Record message)
Feature Guide
141
2. Extension Backup
If the VPS is assigned to ring with other extensions, for example the operator, for the same outside (CO) line, the VPS can be used as a backup for the operator when the operator cannot answer an incoming outside (CO) line call. In order to use this feature, Delayed Ringing must be set for the VPS ( Delayed RingingDay/Night/ Lunch [411-413]).
Normal
PBX
Immediately
Extension (e.g., Operator)
VPS
10 s delay 15 s delay
AA 1 AA 2
3. Status Notification to the VPS

When a call is redirected to the VPS, the PBX sends the status of the called extension to the VPS. This allows the VPS to appropriately handle the call, playing the appropriate OGM for the caller. For example, if the called extension is in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode, the OGM (e.g., "I am unable to answer your call right now, but I will get back to you shortly.") can be played.
VM Service 1. Accessing a Mailbox

The PBX sends special messages to the VPS to indicate which mailbox should be accessed (Followon ID).
2. FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS

An extension user can set his or her calls to be forwarded to the VPS ( 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)). When a call is received at the extension, the PBX sends the extension's mailbox number to the VPS, and the VPS answers the call with the appropriate OGM (e.g., "Hi, I'm out of the office today...").
DIL, DISA
Intercom Call (by Extension, Operator, etc.)
PBX
VPS Extension
FWD
Port 1 Port 2 VM Hunting Chain
142
Feature Guide
3. Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS

Outside (CO) line calls via DISA ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)) can be programmed to be automatically redirected to an extension user's mailbox when the extension user does not or cannot answer them ( 1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing). The VPS can answer the call with an OGM (e.g., "I can't take your call now...") and callers can leave messages in the mailbox. In order to use this feature, a voice mail extension number must be assigned as the intercept destination for the original destination extension that received the call ( CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416], Flexible Ringing Day/Night/Lunch [408-410], Delayed RingingDay/Night/Lunch [411-413]), and "Intercept" must be selected through system programming ( DISA Intercept Mode [507]).
DISA
PBX
VPS Extension
Intercept Immediately 5 s delay
Port 1 Port 2
4. Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS

Extension users can transfer calls to a mailbox, after which callers can leave a message for the desired party. While answering a call, the extension user simply presses the VM Transfer button and enters the extension number of the party the caller wishes to leave a message for. The VPS will answer the transferred call and record a message into the appropriate mailbox. VM Transfer Button In order to use this feature, the extension user must use a flexible CO/Direct Station Selection (DSS) button customised as a VM Transfer button. A voice mail extension number must be assigned to the button when creating it.
5. Listening to Recorded Messages

After the VPS records a message, it will light the appropriate lamp or button on the extension for which the message was intended, to indicate that there is a new message ( 1.17.1 Message Waiting). The proprietary telephone (PT) user can play the message back simply by pressing the MESSAGE button used for mailbox access; he or she does not need to enter a mailbox number. A single line telephone (SLT) user hears a special dial tone (dial tone 3) when going off-hook if there are any messages in his or her mailbox, and can play the message back by entering the Message Waiting Answer feature number.
6. Live Call Screening (LCS)

Similar to a conventional home answering machine, LCS allows a PT user to monitor his or her own mailbox as a caller is leaving a message and, if desired, answer the call simply by pressing the LCS button. PT users can choose one of 2 ways to perform LCS, through personal programming (Live Call Screening [LCS] Mode Set): Hands-free mode: The user can screen calls automatically through the built-in speaker. Private mode: The user will hear an alert tone when a message is being recorded in his or her mailbox. To screen calls, the user must press the MONITOR, SP-PHONE, or LCS button.
Feature Guide
143
LCS/LCS Cancel Button A flexible CO/DSS button can be customised as an LCS or LCS Cancel button.
7. 2-way Recording into the VPS

PT users can record their own telephone conversations. These recordings can be stored in the PT user's own mailbox (2-way Record) or in another user's mailbox (2-way Transfer), depending on which button the user presses to begin recording. 2-way Record/2-way Transfer Button A flexible CO/DSS button can be customised as a 2-way Record or 2-way Transfer button. Note You should inform the other party that the conversation will be recorded before beginning to record any telephone conversation.
Conditions
[General]
A VPS can be assigned as the destination for the following features: FWDAll Calls FWDBusy/No Answer DISA Intercept RoutingNo Answer (IRNA) For these features, the caller does not need to know the mailbox number of the called extension because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS. If a DISA call is forwarded to the VPS by the IRNA feature from a DISA ring group, the PBX will send the VPS the mailbox number of the extension within the DISA ring group that is connected to the lowest-numbered jack.
[Live Call Screening (LCS)]

To prevent the unauthorised screening of calls, a 3-digit password must be entered when activating LCS for an extension. If the user forgets his or her password, it can be cleared by the operator or manager (LCS Password Control). If an extension user is screening a call and then goes off-hook to answer it, the VPS will either stop or continue recording the message, according to system programming ( LCS Recording Mode Set [620]). If a call arrives while an extension user is having a conversation with another party and the extension has Call Waiting activated, the user will hear a call waiting tone. The user can put the existing call on hold before accessing LCS.
[2-way Recording into the VPS]

If all ports of the VPS are busy when a user tries to record a conversation: The user hears an alarm tone when pressing the 2-way Record button. The user hears an alarm tone after pressing the 2-way Transfer button followed by an extension number.

144
Feature Guide

1.8.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected 3.1.2 Changing Personal Settings Using Programming Mode
Feature Guide
145
1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration

Description
A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) or similar product from another manufacturer can provide Automated Attendant (AA) and Voice Mail (VM) services when connected to the PBX. The VPS and PBX communicate with each other by sending DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) signals. For more information, refer to the documentation provided with the VPS.
1. AA Service
Allows the VPS to answer calls and direct callers to dial a number in order to connect themselves to the desired party (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the desired party."). It is possible to access VM service from AA service to, for example, record messages.
2. VM Service
Allows callers to leave voice messages for specific parties, such as an extension user. Extension users can then listen to the messages left in their mailboxes at their convenience.
AA Service
A VPS can be used for the AA service as well as the VM service. When a call is directed to a port of the VPS that is in AA service mode, the caller will hear an outgoing message (OGM). After or while listening to the OGM, the caller may dial an extension number as directed (e.g., "Enter the extension number of the desired party."). If the VPS transfers a call via the AA service, the PBX will inform the VPS of the status of the called party using a DTMF status signal so that the VPS will know the status. This enables the VPS to quickly play an appropriate OGM to the caller (e.g., "I'm handling another call now...", "I'm away from my desk now...", etc.). The DTMF status signals sent by the PBX are explained below. [DTMF Status Signals] Status Ringback Tone Busy Tone Reorder Tone DND Tone Answer Confirm Condition The PBX is ringing the corresponding extension. The called extension is busy. The dialled number is invalid. The called extension has set DND ( Do Not Disturb (DND)). 1.3.1.3 DTMF Status Signal 1 2 3 4 5 9
The called extension has answered the call. The PBX confirms that a feature (such as Message Waiting) has been set or cancelled on the extension. The caller has hung up. The called extension has set FWD to VPS ( 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)) and the PBX is calling another port of the VPS. The called extension has set FWD to VPS and all ports of the VPS are busy.
Disconnect FWD to VM Ringback Tone
#9 6
FWD to VM Busy Tone
146
Feature Guide
Status FWD to Extension Ringback Tone
Condition The PBX is calling an extension other than the one dialled, most likely because the called extension has set its calls to be forwarded to another extension or because it is a member of an idle extension hunting group ( 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting).
DTMF Status Signal 8
System Programming The following settings to enable Inband (DTMF) Integration must be programmed through system programming to match the settings of the VPS. This example uses a Panasonic KX-TVP series VPS, which can be connected to up to 4 extension jacks of the PBX. [Programming Example: Voice Mail Table] Voice Mail Port*2 Jack 07 Enable *1 *2 *3 Enable Jack 08 Enable Jack 15 Disable Jack 16 Disable Plan 1 or Plan 2
DTMF Integration*1
Numbering Plan*3
DTMF Integration [103] DTMF Integration Port [102] Extension Number [009]
In this example: To enable the VM Hunting Chain and AA Hunting Chain, programme as follows:
1) Assign all Voice Mail extensions to one extension group in Extension Group [600]. 2) Assign "Enable" to the group in Hunting Group Set [100]. 3) Select the hunting type of the group in Hunting Type [101]. VM Service 1. Accessing a Mailbox
The PBX sends DTMF signals to the VPS to indicate which mailbox should be accessed (Follow-on ID).
2. Listening to Recorded Messages

After the VPS records a message, it will light the appropriate lamp or button on the extension for which the message was intended, to indicate that there is a new message ( 1.17.1 Message Waiting). The proprietary telephone (PT) user can play the message back simply by pressing the MESSAGE button used for mailbox access. When the button is pressed, the PBX calls the voice mail extension, then sends DTMF signals to the VPS to indicate the extension's mailbox number. A single line telephone (SLT) user hears a special dial tone (dial tone 3) when going off-hook if there are any messages in his or her mailbox, and can play the message back by entering the Message Waiting Answer feature number.
Conditions
A VPS can be assigned as the destination for the following features:
Feature Guide
147
FWDAll Calls FWDBusy/No Answer DISA Intercept RoutingNo Answer (IRNA) ( 1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing, 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)) For these features, the caller does not need to know the mailbox number of the called extension because the code is automatically transmitted to the VPS. In order to achieve proper recording quality, Data Line Security should be turned on for the VPS ( 1.10.5 Data Line Security). Each extension's mailbox number is the same as its extension number. If "TA series" cannot be selected with the PBX type setup menu of the KX-TVP series VPS, select "KXT1232". Follow the steps for the KX-T1232.

1.8.3 If a Voice Processing System is Connected
148
Feature Guide
1.20 Administrative Information Output Features

1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Description
Automatically logs detailed information for the PBX.
1. SMDR Output Port

The Serial Interface (RS-232C) port can be used to output Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) data to a PC, printer, etc.
2. SMDR Output Data

Outside (CO) line call information (Incoming/outgoing) can be logged and sent to the SMDR output port.
3. SMDR Format and Contents

Date Time Ext. CO Dial number Duration 00:00'16" 00:01'43" 00:07'48" 00:00'43" 00:01'43" 00:00'06" > 2013570846 > 00:00'09" 00:00'08" 00:00'08" 00:00'17" 00:11'00" 00:11'00" 00:03'00" 00:13'55" 00:11'48" Code .... .... .... .... .... 4536 .... 0 .... 0 .... .... 2 . . 13 .101 .... .... ....
12/31/04 12:52PM 103 12/31/04 12:53PM 103
05 12345678901234567890123456789012 02 < incoming > 2013570846 > 1234567890123456 > 2013570846 > 0921234557 < incoming < BV incoming < DIL incoming < DISA incoming < DISA incoming
12/31/04 *12:54PM 101 02 12/31/04 12:55PM 101B 02 12/31/04 12:56PM 107B 03 12/31/04 12/31/04 12/31/04 12/31/04 12/31/04 12/31/04 12/31/04 12/31/04 12/31/04 12/31/04 1:04PM 103 1:04PM 102 1:05PM 103 1:06PM 103 1:07PM 103 2:15PM 103 2:26PM 103 2:27PM 116 3:25PM 05 01
06 092. . . 1438
01 092123456789 01 0921234567 01 0921234567 01 F/0927654321 05 9=0924567123 02 < UCD waiting >
1:06PM C-05 02 0921234567
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
Feature Guide
149
[Explanation] The following table explains the types of data logged by SMDR. The section numbers below refer to the field indicated by the numbers above. Section Number (1) Date Data Description Shows the date (Month/Day/Year) of the call ( Date & Time [000]). The date order varies depending on the user's country/ area. Shows the start time of a call as hour/minute/AM or PM. Also shows the following code: *: Transferred call ( 1.11.1 Call Transfer)
(2)
Time
(3)
Ext. (Extension) Shows the number of the extension that was engaged in the call. Also shows the following codes: xxxB: Call answered by the BV feature ( 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)) (xxx=Number of the extension to which the call was directed before the BV feature answered) Even if a caller does not leave a voice message, for example, by going on-hook while hearing a personal/common BV outgoing message (OGM), the information is logged. C-xx: Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) line call via the DISA feature ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)) (xx=Outside (CO) line number that receives the DISA call) CO Shows the outside (CO) line number used for the call.
(4)
150
Feature Guide
Section Number (5)
Data Dial Number
Description [Outside (CO) Line Call] Outgoing Outside (CO) Line Call Shows the dialled telephone number (max. 32 digits). Digits shown are as follows: 0 through 9, , #, - (hyphen) F/: Flash/recall signal ( 1.10.6 Flash/Recall) =: Host PBX Access code marker ( 1.5.2.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)) The marker is displayed between the Host PBX Access code and the dialled number when a Host PBX Access code is entered. . (dot): Secret Dialling Incoming Outside (CO) Line Call Shows <incoming> + the caller's telephone number (max. 16 digits). A caller's telephone number is displayed only when an optional Caller ID card is installed and "With CID" is selected in Caller ID SMDR Format [906]. It is also possible to show a caller's telephone number before the call is answered ( Caller ID SMDR Printout [907]). Also shows the following codes: <DISA incoming> + the caller's telephone number (max. 16 digits): Incoming outside (CO) line call via the DISA feature <BV incoming>: Incoming outside (CO) line call to the common message area of the BV feature <DIL incoming>: Incoming outside (CO) line call via the DIL feature ( 1.1.1.1 Direct In Line (DIL)) <UCD waiting>: Incoming outside (CO) line call via the UCD feature ( 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)) When the UCD waiting call is answered, a new record is started.
(6) (7)
Duration Code
Shows the duration of the outside (CO) line call or the UCD call waiting time in hours/minutes/seconds. Shows the account code appended to the call ( 1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry), the account code index number (e.g., 13), the number of the extension that used the Walking COS feature (e.g., 101), or DISA security code status (e.g., 0). 0: A DISA incoming call without a DISA security code 1 to 4: A DISA incoming call with a DISA security code number Actual DISA security codes are not printed by SMDR ( DISA Security Code [512]).
Feature Guide
151
The following data can be controlled through system programming to adjust whether (or how) they are printed or displayed by SMDR. [Programmable Items] Item Incoming/Outgoing outside (CO) line call Description Controls whether incoming/outgoing outside (CO) line calls are shown ( Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802]). Even if "On" or "Toll" is selected for outgoing outside (CO) line calls or even if "On" is selected for incoming outside (CO) line calls, when "MODE 2" is selected in SMDR Mode for Printing [929], the call log information is not displayed by SMDR, but the information for each extension is displayed by Call Log Printout. If "Toll" is selected for outgoing outside (CO) line calls, only calls that are checked in TRSCOS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305] and are allowed, are shown. Controls whether a caller's telephone number is shown ( Caller ID SMDR Format [906]). When this is set to display telephone numbers, even if the PBX receives a caller's name by the Caller ID feature, only the telephone number is shown. Controls whether secret dialling numbers stored in System Speed Dialling Number [001] or stored in One-touch Dialling button are shown by SMDR ( Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression [803]). Controls whether the account code stored in Account Code [310] or just the index of the account code is shown ( SMDR Account Code [805]). The index of the account code is shown when "Verify-All" or "Verify-Toll" is selected in Account Code Mode [605]. Controls whether system programming items that have already been assigned are shown based on the following parameters ( System Data Dump [804]):
Caller's identification
Secret Dialling
Account Code
System programming items
a) All para: All data b) System para: All data except for "CO para", "Extn. para",
"DSS para" and "Speed dial"
c) CO para: The data assigned for each outside (CO) line d) Extn. para: The data assigned for each extension e) DSS para: The data assigned on the Direct Station
Selection (DSS) buttons and Programmable Feature (PF) buttons on the DSS Console
f)
Speed dial: The System Speed Dialling numbers and names in System Speed Dialling Number [001] and System Speed Dialling Name [011]
g) Stop output: Not shown
Conditions
Multilingual Display by SMDR It is possible to select the display language used for SMDR through system programming ( Language [806]). SMDR
152
Feature Guide
The PBX waits for a preprogrammed length of time ( Call Duration Counter Start [204]) after the end of seizing an outside (CO) line or dialling before starting the SMDR timer for outgoing outside (CO) line calls. When the PBX has sent out all dialled digits to the telephone company and this timer expires, the PBX begins measuring the duration of the call. A display proprietary telephone (PT) shows the elapsed time of the call. The starting time and the total duration of the call are logged by SMDR. SMDR Format The following SMDR format parameters can be set through system programming ( SMDR Parameter [801]) in order to match the paper size being used by the printer:
a) Page Length: determines the number of lines per page. b) Skip Perforation: determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page.
The page length should be at least 4 lines longer than the skip perforation length.
Skip Perforation
Page Length (66 lines)
Machine Perforation
Serial Interface (RS-232C) Parameters The following communication parameters can be assigned for the Serial Interface (RS-232C port) through system programming ( SMDR RS-232C Parameter [800]):
a) New Line (NL) Code: Select the code appropriate for the PC or printer. If the PC or printer
automatically feeds lines with carriage return, select "CR". If not, select "CR+LF".
b) Baud Rate: Baud rate indicates the transmission speed of data from the PBX to the PC or printer. c) Word Length: Word length indicates how many bits compose each character. d) Parity Bit: Parity bit indicates what type of parity is used to detect errors in the string of bits
composing a character. Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the PC or printer.
e) Stop Bit Length: Stop bit indicates the end of a bit string that composes a character. Select an
appropriate value depending on the requirements of the PC or printer.

Feature Guide
153
1.20.2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension

Description
An extension assigned as the manager extension can use the following features through manager programming:
a) Call Log Print Out, Reference, and Clear, for Each Extension b) All Clear
[Example] The manager can print out call logs for each extension. Up to 500 outgoing outside (CO) line calls can be logged in the PBX. When the call log is full, the oldest call will be replaced each time a call is received. The call logs stored since the manager cleared the call log for the extension can be printed out.
********************************************** * 103 : Tony Viola * ********************************************** (1) Starting Date Present Date Date Time : Dec.29.04 07:00PM** : Dec.31.04 09:00AM Ext. 103 103 103 103 103 CO 05 01 01 01 01 Dial number 12345678901234567890123456789012 092123456789 0921234567 0921234567 F/0927654321 Duration 00:00'16" 00:00'08" 00:11'00" 00:11'00" 00:03'00" Code .... .... ..13 .101 ....
12/31/04 *12:52PM 12/31/04 1:06PM 12/31/04 1:07PM 12/31/04 2:15PM 12/31/04 2:26PM
(1) "Starting Date" shows the start date (Month/Day/Year) of the call log. When it is different from "Present Date", "**" is shown, indicating that there may be overwritten calls that are not shown on the print out.
Conditions
Even if an extension user holds a call, the duration of the call will be counted. If an extension user transfers the call, the count of duration will restart at the destination extension. SMDR Mode for Printing One of the following modes can be selected through system programming ( SMDR Mode for Printing [929]):
a) MODE 1
Outside (CO) line call information can be displayed by SMDR ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)), and call log information for each extension can be displayed by Call Log Printout.
b) MODE 2
Only call log information for each extension can be displayed by Call Log Printout.

3.2.2 Viewing, Printing, and Clearing Call Logs
154
Feature Guide
1.21 Extension Controlling Features

1.21.1 Extension Feature Clear
Description
Extension users can simultaneously clear all of the following features set on their own telephone: Feature Absent Message Automatic Callback Busy Background Music (BGM) Call Forwarding (FWD) Call Pickup Deny Call Waiting Data Line Security Do Not Disturb (DND) Executive Busy Override Deny Hot Line Log-in/Log-out Message Waiting Paging Deny Room Monitor Timed Reminder Voice Mail Integration Off Off Off Off Allow Disable Off Off Allow The stored telephone numbers will be cleared. Log-in All messages left by other extensions will be cleared. Allow Off Cleared Off Value after Extension Feature Clear
This feature is also known as Station Feature Clear or Station Programme Clear.

1.7.8 Clearing Features Set at Your Extension (Extension Feature Clear)
Feature Guide
155
1.21.2 Timed Reminder

Description
Each extension user can set an alarm to be used as a wake-up call or reminder. This feature can be programmed to activate daily or one time only. If the user goes off-hook during the alarm, a special dial tone (dial tone 3) will be heard. Remote Timed Reminder An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension can remotely set, cancel, and confirm the timed reminder of the desired extension. This feature is useful, for example, for a small hotel or motel to set a wake-up call for an extension in a guest room, or for a parent to set a wake-up call for an extension in a child's room.
Conditions
Be sure that the PBX clock is set to the correct time. Setting a new alarm time clears the previous alarm time. There is no limit for the number of the extensions that can set Timed Reminder at the same time.

1.7.1 Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder) 2.1.3 Setting an Alarm for Other Extensions (Remote Timed Reminder [Wake-up Call])
156
Feature Guide
1.22 Audible Tone Features

1.22.1 Dial Tone
Description
The following dial tones inform extension users about features activated on their extensions: Type Tone 1 Tone 2 Description A normal dial tone is heard when none of the features listed for dial tones 2 through 5 have been set. Heard when any of the following features is set. Absent Message Background Music (BGM) (for proprietary telephones [PTs] only) Call Forwarding (FWD) Call Pickup Deny Data Line Security Do Not Disturb (DND) Extension Lock Hot Line (for single line telephones [SLTs] only) Message Waiting (for PTs only) Remote Extension Lock Timed Reminder Heard when any of the following features is performed. Account Code Entry Answering a call from Timed Reminder Going off-hook with an SLT that has messages waiting Heard when going off-hook if new voice messages have been recorded (Built-in Voice Message [BV]). Heard when going off-hook if the remaining voice message recording time is less than 5 minutes or if 125 voice messages have been recorded (Built-in Voice Message [BV]).
Tone 3
Tone 4 Tone 5
Conditions
Dial Tone Type for ARS Through system programming, it is possible to select the dial tone type for the Automatic Route Selection (ARS) feature ( ARS Dial Tone [362]).

Feature Guide
157
1.22.2 Confirmation Tone

Description
At the end of a feature operation, the PBX confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone to the extension user. Type Tone 1 Tone 2 Description Sent when the setting is accepted, or sent when the Extension Lock feature is set or cancelled. Sent when the new setting is identical to the previous one, or sent when certain features are successfully performed or accessed (e.g., Call Hold, Automatic Callback Busy). Sent before a conversation is established when accessing the following features: Call Pickup Call Hold Retrieve with the Feature Number Conference Paging/Paging Answer
Tone 3
Conditions
It is possible to eliminate confirmation tone 3 (except for Call Hold Retrieve with the Feature Number) through system programming.

158
Feature Guide
Section
System Configuration and Administration Features
Feature Guide
159
2.1 System ConfigurationHardware
2.1
2.1.1
System ConfigurationHardware
Extension Jack Configuration
Description
Extension jacks are used to connect proprietary telephones (PTs), single line telephones (SLTs), Direct Station Selection (DSS) Consoles, and Voice Processing Systems (VPSs) to the PBX.
Conditions
PT and SLT in Parallel Mode A PT and an SLT can be connected to an extension jack and used in parallel mode. DSS Console and Paired Telephone Assignment When a DSS Console is connected, a PT must be paired with the DSS Console through system programming ( DSS Console Jack Assignment [003], Console Paired Telephone [004]). Each extension jack number should be unique. Automatic Detection A PT and an SLT can be connected to an extension jack with no programming required.
160
Feature Guide
2.2 System ConfigurationSoftware
2.2
2.2.1
System ConfigurationSoftware
Class of Service (COS)
Description
Each extension is assigned a class of service (COS) number ( TRS-COSDay/Night/Lunch [601-603]). The following features operate differently depending on an extension's COS.
a) TRS ( 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)) b) Walking COS ( 1.8.4 Walking COS)
Conditions
Walking COS An extension user can make a call from an extension with a lower COS by using his or her own COS temporarily.

1.2.6 Using Your Calling Privileges at Another Extension (Walking COS)
Feature Guide
161
2.2.2
Group
Description
This PBX supports various types of groups.
1. Outside (CO) Line Group

Outside (CO) lines can be grouped into 8 outside (CO) line groups based on properties such as carrier or outside (CO) line type ( CO Line Group Number [404]). Each outside (CO) line can belong to only one outside (CO) line group.
2. Extension Group
Extensions can be grouped into 8 extension groups ( Extension Group [600]). Each extension group can have the following attribute set:
a) b) c) d) e)
Call Pickup Group Paging Group Idle Extension Hunting Group Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Group Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring Group
Every extension must belong to one extension group and cannot belong to more than one extension group. Assignable Extensions: Proprietary telephones (PTs)/single line telephones (SLTs) [Example]
Extension Group 1 Extension Group 2 Extension Group 3 Extension Group 4
Extn. 101 Extn. 102
Extn. 103 Extn. 104
Extn. 105 Extn. 106
Extn. 107 Extn. 108
2.1. Call Pickup Group

Using the Call Pickup feature, extensions can answer any calls within the call pickup group to which they belong.
2.2. Paging Group

Using the Paging feature, extensions can make a page to any paging group, or answer a page made to any group.
2.3. Idle Extension Hunting Group

If a called extension is busy, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the same extension group ( Hunting Group Set [100]). When calls are received, idle extensions are automatically searched for according to a preprogrammed hunting type ( Hunting Type [101]): Circular Hunting or Terminated Hunting.
2.4. Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Group

A UCD group is a group of extensions that receives UCD calls directed to the group ( UCD Group [520]). To use this feature, "UCD" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416]).
162
Feature Guide
2.5. Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring Group

A DISA ring group is a specific extension group that receives DISA calls directed to the group. All extensions in the group assigned as an Automated Attendant (AA) destination ( DISA Built-in AA [501]) ring simultaneously. To use this feature, "DISA" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416]) and "With AA" must be selected as the destination of incoming outside (CO) line calls via the DISA feature ( DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500]).

1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup 1.14.1 Paging
Feature Guide
163
2.2.3
Time Service
Description
Time service modes are used by many PBX features to determine how they will function during different times of day. For example, incoming calls can be directed to sales staff during the day and to a Voice Processing System (VPS) at night, extension users can be prohibited from making long-distance calls during lunch time, etc. There are 3 time service modesday, night, and lunch. The start times of each time service mode and end time of lunch mode are programmed for each day of the week in a Time Table.
1. Time Service Switching Mode

The current time service mode can switch automatically to another time service mode at the time assigned in the Time Table. It is possible, however, to switch time service modes manually. Whether time service modes are normally switched manually or automatically is determined through system programming ( Time Service Switching Mode [006]). Switching Mode Automatic Description The current time service mode will switch automatically to another time service mode at the time assigned in the Time Table, and can be switched manually by pressing the Day, Night, or Lunch button or by entering the Time Service feature number. Condition
Manual
The current time service mode (day/night/lunch) and the switching mode (automatic/manual) can be switched manually by an extension assigned as the operator or The current time service mode will switch only manager extension. when the Day, Night, or Lunch button is pressed or when the Time Service feature number is entered.
2. Time Table
A Time Table has 3 modesday, night, and lunch. A Time Table can be programmed to control when each time service mode starts (and therefore, the previous time service mode ends), and can be programmed separately for each day of the week. [Programming Example: Time Table] Time Schedule* Day Start Time Sunday Monday Tuesday (Cont.) : : * Not Stored 09:00 09:00 : : Night Start Time Not Stored 17:00 17:00 : : Start Time Not Stored 12:00 12:00 : : Lunch End Time Not Stored 13:00 13:00 : :
Time Service Start Time [007]
164
Feature Guide
[Visualisation of Time Schedule]

Monday 00:00 Time Table Night Day Lunch Night Day Lunch Day Night 03:00 06:00 09:00 12:00 15:00 18:00 21:00 Tuesday 00:00
Note that time service modes can be arranged as they are needed (for example, night mode can occur in the morning and afternoon, if necessary) and not all time service modes need to be used in a time schedule. Also note that day mode or night mode resumes automatically when lunch mode ends.
3. Programming Items Using Time Service

The following programming items will be affected by the time service:
a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j)
Flexible Outward DiallingDay/Night/Lunch [405-407] Flexible RingingDay/Night/Lunch [408-410] Delayed RingingDay/Night/Lunch [411-413] CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416] DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension AssignmentDay/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand only) DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension AssignmentDay/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand only) DISA IRNA to BVDay/Night/Lunch [438-440] TRS-COSDay/Night/Lunch [601-603] Doorphone RingingDay/Night/Lunch [700-702] Door OpenerDay/Night/Lunch [703-705]
4. Day/Night/Lunch Button
A flexible Direct Station Selection (DSS) button can customised as a Day, Night, or Lunch button by the operator or manager. These buttons can be used to switch the current time service mode. Each button shows the current status as follows: Light Pattern Off Red on Day/Night/Lunch off Day/Night/Lunch on Status
Note Extension users can press the "#" key on their proprietary telephones (PTs) to display the current time service mode.
Conditions
The start times of each time service mode and end time of lunch mode can be specified through system programming ( Time Service Start Time [007]).
Feature Guide
165


1.7.7 Checking the Time Service Mode 2.1.2 Switching the Time Service Mode (Time Service)
166
Feature Guide
2.2.4
Operator/Manager Features
Description
This PBX supports one operator and one manager. Any extension can be designated as the operator through system programming ( Operator Assignment [008]). The operator is the destination of Operator Call. The extension connected to extension jack 01 is the manager extension. An extension assigned as the operator or manager extension is allowed to use certain features that most extensions cannot, as follows: Feature Manager Programming Description Manager Password* Required Details in 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling Personal/System 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling Personal/System 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 1.20.2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension
System Speed Sets the System Speed Dialling Number Dialling number. [001] System Speed Dialling Name [011] DISA Security Code [512] DISA Security Code Digits [530] Sets the System Speed Dialling name. Sets the DISA security code.
Required
Required
Sets the number of digits for Required the DISA security code.
Required Call Log Printout Prints, views, and clears for Each call logs for each extension. Extension Extension Password Set Required Sets the extension password. This password is used for the Walking COS feature and the Remote Extension Lock feature. Each extension's password should be unique. Sets or cancels Extension Lock on an extension remotely. Switches the time service mode manually. Not required
Remote Extension Lock
1.8.3 Extension Lock 2.2.3 Time Service 1.21.2 Timed Reminder 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log
Time Service
Not required
Remote Timed Reminder (Wake-up Sets or cancels Timed Not required Call) Reminder to any extension remotely. Incoming Call Log in the Common Clears all Caller ID AreaCLEAR ALL information stored in the common area. Not required
Feature Guide
167
Feature
Description
Manager Password* Not required
Details in 1.8.3 Extension Lock 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log
Incoming Call Log Display Lock in Locks or unlocks the the Common Area Incoming Call Log for the common area.
301st Incoming Call Logged in the Selects how new calls are Not required Common Area treated when Incoming Call Log for the common area is full. Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD Not required Records and plays back OGMs used by DISA, Uniform Call Distribution (UCD), and 3-level Automated Attendant (AA). Erases OGMs used by DISA and UCD. Adjusts the current date and time. Not required
1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD
Date and Time Setting Extension LockCANCEL ALL LCS Password Control
1.8.3 Extension Lock 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
Cancels Extension Lock at Not required all extensions. Clears the Live Call Not required Screening (LCS) password. Not required Records, plays back, and erases a common BV OGM in the common message area that can be accessed by either the operator or manager.
Common BV OGM
* The system password may be entered instead of the extension password for the manager (manager password). Operator Call An extension user can call the operator by entering the Operator Call number ( Automatic Line Access [121]), often simply, "0". If no operator is assigned, the caller will hear a reorder tone. If the Automatic Line Access number is assigned to "0" through system programming, the Operator Call number will be changed to "9". Note For New Zealand, the Automatic Line Access number may be either 1 or 9.

1.2.1 Basic Calling 2.1 Control Features 3.2.2 Viewing, Printing, and Clearing Call Logs
168
Feature Guide
2.3 System Data Control
2.3
2.3.1
System Data Control

PC Programming
Description
System programming settings can be accessed using a PC and the Panasonic KX-TE Maintenance Console software as well as by using a proprietary telephone (PT) ( 2.3.2 PT Programming). System programming and data upload/download can be performed either through on-site programming or remote programming.
1. On-site Programming: Programming that is performed using an on-site PC connected directly to

the PBX.
2. Remote Programming: Programming that is performed using an off-site PC that connects to the
PBX via an outside (CO) line.
1. Connection Methods for On-site Programming

Method Serial Interface (RS232C port) USB Description The PC is connected to the PBX via the Serial Interface (RS-232C port) of the PBX. Required Hardware
The PC is connected to the PBX via the USB port of the PBX.
Feature Guide
169
2. Connection Methods for Remote Programming

Method Remote modem Description Call the PBX and have the call directed to the internal modem using one of the following methods: Direct Access: Using a modem, dial the telephone number to connect to the internal modem. To use this feature, "MODEM" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416]). DISA: Using a telephone, dial the telephone number to reach the DISA line ( 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)). After hearing a DISA outgoing message (OGM), enter the Remote Maintenance feature number to access the internal modem. To use this feature, "DISA" must be selected as the distribution method for the desired outside (CO) line port ( CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416]). Call Transfer: Using a telephone, call an extension user, such as the operator, to request to be transferred to the internal modem using the Remote Maintenance feature number ( 1.11.1 Call Transfer). When the modem answer tone is heard, the PBX is ready for access. Required Hardware User-supplied modem
Conditions
Only one system programming session is permitted at a time. Access will be denied to a second party who tries to perform system programming, including system programming via a PT. System programming can be performed either in interactive or batch mode. System Password To access system programming in interactive mode, a valid password must be entered. The password is set at the factory but can be changed through system programming ( System Password [002]). A user can upload system programming data from a PC to the PBX or download it from the PBX to a PC. If communications between the PBX and PC fail before completing Firmware Upgrade or system programming data upload from a PC to the PBX, the successfully transferred portion of the data can still be used. Firmware Upgrade can be performed only through on-site programming using Serial Interface (RS232C port) or USB.

3.2 Connection 3.1 Installing KX-TE Maintenance Console
170
Feature Guide

1.1.1.1 Direct In Line (DIL) 3.2 PC Programming
Feature Guide
171
2.3.2
PT Programming
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) can be used to customise the settings of the PBX or of an extension, using the following programming features: Programming Type Personal Programming System Programming Manager Programming Description Used by an extension user to customise the extension's settings. Used by an authorised party to customise the PBX. Used by the manager to customise 4 system programming settings of the PBX, set a password to each extension, and print out call log information for each extension. Example One-touch Dialling, Line Preference Outgoing, etc. Authorised Programmer Extension user
System Password, Authorised Extension Number, etc. administrator System Speed Dialling Manager Number, Extension Password Set, Call Log Printout for Each Extension, etc.
Conditions
The manager extension is the extension that is connected to the lowest-numbered jack (jack 01) of the PBX and can therefore perform manager programming. Only one system programming (including PC programming) or manager programming session is permitted at a time. These 2 programming features cannot be performed simultaneously by 2 users. During programming, the PT is considered to be busy and will not receive calls. System Password To access system programming, the administrator system password must be entered. The system password is set at the factory but can be changed through system programming ( System Password [002]). The administrator can programme all system programming. Manager Password To set the manager password, it is necessary to use the system password to perform Extension Password Set. Once set, the manager password can be used to access manager programming. The manager can assign a password to each extension (extension password). Personal Programming Data Reset A PT user can simultaneously reset all settings made through personal programming (Line PreferenceIncoming/Outgoing, Call Waiting Tone Type Selection, etc.) to their default settings. This feature also cancels pressing the AUTO ANS/MUTE button in the Hands-free Answerback feature and the Room Monitor feature. System Programming Data Reset The PBX can return all or specific settings made through system programming to their default settings based on the following parameters ( System Data Clear [999]):
a) b) c) d)
All para: All data System para: All data except for "CO para", "Extn. para", and "DSS para" CO para: The data assigned for each outside (CO) line Extn. para: The data assigned for each extension
172
Feature Guide
e) DSS para: The data assigned on the Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons and Programmable
Feature (PF) buttons on the DSS Console
f)
Speed dial: The System Speed Dialling numbers and names in System Speed Dialling Number [001] and System Speed Dialling Name [011]

2.10.1 Starting the Advanced Hybrid System

2.2.4 Operator/Manager Features 3.3 PT Programming

3.1 Customising Your Phone (Personal Programming) 3.2 Managing Call Logs 3.3 Customising Your PBX (System Programming)
Feature Guide
173
2.3.3
Automatic Time Adjustment
Description
The PBX clock can be adjusted automatically according to the time information received from your telephone company. Time information can be received when an incoming call with Caller ID that includes time information is received. The PBX clock will be adjusted every day with the first call after 3:05 A.M., if enabled through system programming ( Automatic Time Adjustment [152]). Note Since the PBX clock is put ahead by one hour on the Summer Time start date, a timed reminder set within one hour of the Automatic Time Adjustment feature will not ring. Since the PBX clock is put back by one hour on the Summer Time end date, a timed reminder set within one hour before the Automatic Time Adjustment feature will ring 2 times.
Conditions
SMDR will log call information using the PBX clock so that the logging time will be overlapped at the end of Summer Time ( 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)).

1.21.2 Timed Reminder
174
Feature Guide
2.3.4
Feature Numbering
Description
To call another extension user or to access PBX features, access numbers (extension numbers or feature numbers) are required. Feature numbers are available while:
1. 2. 3. 4.
a dial tone is heard a busy, Do Not Disturb (DND), ringback tone is heard dialling or talking on-hook
1. Feature Numbering (available while a dial tone is heard)

Extension numbers and features that are available while a dial tone is heard have fixed numbers and flexible numbers respectively, shown in the following table:
a) Extension Numbers:
The extension numbering plan can be selected through system programming ( Extension Number [009]). When the extension numbering plan is selected, the default extension numbers change automatically as follows*: Plan 1/Plan 2: extension jacks 01 through 24extension numbers 101 through 124 Plan 3: extension jacks 01 through 24extension numbers 11 through 34 If a rotary single line telephone (SLT) is used at any extension, select "Plan 1". Note * For United Kingdom and New Zealand, when the extension numbering plan is selected, the default extension numbers change automatically as follows: Plan 1/Plan 2: extension jacks 01 through 24extension numbers 201 through 224 Plan 3: extension jacks 01 through 24extension numbers 21 through 44
b) Feature Numbers:
When "Plan 2" or "Plan 3" is selected, feature numbers starting with "7" are useable with and without "#" added before "7". [Example] The default feature number for setting "Do Not Disturb (DND)" is "714#". "714#" and "#714#" are both available for "Plan 2" and "Plan 3". To make them easier to remember, it may be helpful to replace the new feature numbers for "Plan 2" and "Plan 3" with the code numbers 50 through 59, through system programming ( Second Feature Numbering Plan [012]).
Feature Guide
175
[Feature Numbering Table (available while a dial tone is heard)] Numbering Feature Plan 1 Absent Message (set/cancel) Account Code Entry for an SLT Automatic Line Access (Local Access)*1 Built-in Voice Message (BV) (record/play/ erase) Call Forwarding (FWD)All Calls, Busy/No Answer (set/cancel) Call Hold (Hold Mode 2 or 3) for an SLT Call Hold Retrieve for outside (CO) line calls/ intercom calls Call Park/Call Park Retrieve*2 Call Pickup Deny (set/cancel) Call Waiting for intercom calls/doorphone calls (set/cancel) Call Waiting for outside (CO) line calls (set/ cancel) Common BV Outgoing Message (OGM) (record/play/erase) Conference (5-party) Data Line Security (set/cancel) Directed Call Pickup Do Not Disturb (DND) (set/cancel) Doorphone Call/Door Open Executive Busy Override Deny (set/cancel) Extension Lock (set/cancel) Extension Number*3 External Feature Access (EFA) for an SLT Extension Feature Clear FWDFollow Me (set/cancel) FWD to BV (set/cancel) 100199 31/55 4 71 #31/#55 733 77 100499 6 79 71 71 #/0 (5/8) + extn. no. + #/ 0 ([1 or 2 + 725]/0) + #/ 0 1049 22 730 #41 20 53/5 22/52 72 732 731 722 #22 49 or 9/0 725 71 #20 #59/#5 #22/#56 outside (CO) line no. (18)/extn. no. 09 (1/0) + #/0 (1/0) + #/0 (1/0) + #/0 0124 + (1/2/0) + #/0 (phone no. + CONF) 4 times + CONF (1/0) + #/0 extn. no. (4/0) + #/0 14 (0/1) + #/0 00009999 (2 times/ one time) + #/0 Plan 2 75 Plan 3 (16 [+ parameter]/ 0) + #/0 account code + outside phone no. outside phone no. ([1 + extn. no.]/2/0) + #/0 ([1 or 2 + extn. no.]/ 0) + #/0 Additional Number
176
Feature Guide
Numbering Feature Plan 1 FWD to Outside (CO) Line (set/cancel) Plan 2 71 Plan 3 (3 + outside (CO) line access no. + outside phone no. + #)/(0 + #/0) ([1 or 2 + extn. no.]/ 0) + #/0 #40 74 74 70 70 ## or 80 77 736 738 738 70 70 70 784 70 0/9 8 33 33 34 43 734 #33 #33 #34 #43 (1/0) + # 18 + outside phone no. or 9 0/18 ### or 80 000999 (2 times/ one time) + # (0/1) + #/0 (2/0) + #/0 (1/0) + #/0 (1/2) + extn. no. + #/ 0 0 + #/0 3 + extn. no. + # #/0 40009999 (2 times/ one time) + #/0 2 + phone no. + # (1/0) + #/0 # # Additional Number
FWD to Voice Processing System (VPS) (set/cancel) Group Call Pickup Hot Line for an SLT (programme) Hot Line for an SLT (set/cancel) Incoming Call Log in the Personal Area CLEAR ALL Incoming Call Log in the Common Area CLEAR ALL Last Number Redial for an SLT Live Call Screening (LCS) Password (set/ cancel) Log-in/Log-out Logging of Caller ID Information in the Common Area (set/cancel) Logging of Caller ID Information in the Personal Area (set/cancel) Message Waiting (leave/cancel for a caller) Message Waiting (cancel all for a called extension) Message Waiting (cancel all for another extension) Message Waiting Answer for an SLT Message Waiting for Another Extension Lock (set/cancel) Operator Call Outside (CO) Line Group Access PagingAll Extensions & External PagingAll Extensions/Group PagingExternal Paging Answer Paging Deny (set/cancel) 40
71
Feature Guide
177
Numbering Feature Plan 1 Personal BV OGM (record/play/erase) Personal Speed Dialling (confirm) Personal Speed Dialling (dial) Personal Speed Dialling (programme) Remote Maintenance Remote Timed Reminder (set/cancel/ confirm) Room Monitor (set/cancel) Room Monitor through a doorphone System Speed Dialling for an SLT (dial) Timed Reminder (set/cancel) Timed Reminder (confirm) Time Service (set/cancel) Walking COS 21st Incoming Call Logged in the Personal Area (disregard the newest call/overwrite the oldest call) 301st Incoming Call Logged in the Common Area (disregard the newest call/overwrite the oldest call)
*1 *2 *3 *4
Additional Number Plan 2 723 3 1 or # 2 729 764 extn. no. + # + 76 + ([hhmm + parameter]*4/2/3) + # (1/0) + # #31 14 0099 76 76 78 7 737 ([hhmm + parameter]*4/2) + #/0 3+# ([13]/0) + # extn. password + the user's extn. no. + #/0 (0/1) + # 1 or ## Plan 3 (1/2/0) + #/0 09 + # 09 09 + phone no. + #
735 31
737
(2/3) + #
For New Zealand: 1 or 9 For United Kingdom/New Zealand: Plan 1: 36/56; Plan 2/Plan 3: #36/#56 For United Kingdom/New Zealand: Plan 1: 200299; for New Zealand: Plan 2: 200499, Plan 3: 2049 hh: hour (0112), mm: minute (0059), AM/PM (0/1), one time/daily (1/2)
2. Feature Numbering (available while a busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)

Features that are available while a busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard have fixed numbers, as shown in the following table: [Feature Numbering Table (available while a busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)] Feature Automatic Callback Busy Busy Station Signalling (BSS)/DND Override Executive Busy Override Numbering 6 2 3
178
Feature Guide
3. Feature Numbering (available while dialling or talking)

Features that are available while dialling or talking have fixed numbers, as shown in the following table: [Feature Numbering Table (available while dialling or talking)] Feature Alternate CallingRing/Voice Call Retrieving from a Telephone Answering Machine (TAM) Conference (3-party) for an SLT Door Open Pulse to Tone Conversion
*1 *2
Numbering
4*1 3*2 5 #
Dial after dialling the TAM's extension number and hearing its busy tone. Plan 1: 3; Plan 2/Plan 3: #3
4. Feature Numbering (available while on-hook)

Features that are available while on-hook have fixed numbers, as shown in the following table: [Feature Numbering Table (available while on-hook)] Feature Background Music (BGM) set/cancel Time Service mode display Extension number and extension name display/ date (month/day) and time display/ date (month/day/year/day of the week) display changing Numbering 1 #
Conditions
If a feature number includes " " or "#" except for those that can use "0" instead of "#", rotary SLT users cannot use it. Feature number + Additional number (Parameter) Certain feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active. For example, to set Call Waiting, the feature number for "Call Waiting" must be followed by "1" and to cancel it, the same feature number should be followed by "0".

4.2.1 Feature Number Table
Feature Guide
179
2.3.5
Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type
Description
The dialling mode (DTMF [Dual Tone Multi-Frequency]/Pulse) of connected outside (CO) lines is automatically assigned after restarting the PBX using the System Clear Switch or through system programming ( System Data Clear [999]). No system programming in Dial Mode [401] and Pulse Speed [402] is required unless the dialling mode of the connected outside (CO) line is Call Blocking. Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type can also be programmed the first time the PBX is accessed with a PC using the KX-TE Maintenance Console software (Quick Setup). For more information about Quick Setup, refer to the Installation Manual ( 3.1.1 Installing KX-TE Maintenance Console on a PC).
Conditions
If no outside (CO) lines are connected to the outside (CO) line ports of the PBX, the default values are assigned automatically. It takes a maximum of 4 minutes to complete checking the dialling mode, unless the outside (CO) line is in use. In this case, the PBX will start checking it after the outside (CO) line becomes idle. This feature will not function properly when: It takes 3 seconds or more to detect the dialling mode of your telephone company. The cable from the outside (CO) line is disconnected while the PBX is checking the dialling mode. If your telephone company or a host PBX can receive both DTMF and Pulse signals, the PBX selects an outside (CO) line type according to the following priority: Pulse (Low) Pulse (High) DTMF

4.1.5 System Reset with System Data Clear

1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection
180
Feature Guide
2.3.6
Country Setting
Description
The country code of the PBX can be selected through system programming ( Country [995]). The PBX will restart with the default settings of the user's country/area. During this operation, communication between the PBX and PC will be disconnected one time. Country Setting can also be programmed the first time the PBX is accessed with a PC using the KX-TE Maintenance Console software (Quick Setup). For more information about Quick Setup, refer to the Installation Manual ( 3.1.1 Installing KX-TE Maintenance Console on a PC).
Conditions
This feature is only available when the suffix of the connected PBX is "NE" or "CE".
Feature Guide
181
2.3.7
Firmware Upgrade
Description
It is possible to upgrade the PBX software via the Serial Interface (RS-232C port) or USB port using the KXTE Maintenance Console software. Even if a user upgrades the PBX software, the system data will not be lost. For more information on how to upgrade the PBX software, refer to the on-line help.
Conditions
The ROM and the firmware version can be confirmed through system programming ( Version [998]). Firmware

182
Feature Guide
2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics
2.4
2.4.1
Fault Recovery/Diagnostics
Power Failure Transfer
Description
If the power supply to the PBX fails, specific single line telephones (SLTs) are automatically connected to specific outside (CO) lines (Power Failure Connections). The PBX will switch from the current connections to Power Failure Connections, and all existing conversations will be disconnected. Only outside (CO) line calls handled by Power Failure Connections can be made during a power failure.
Conditions
During a power failure, each of the following outside (CO) lines will be connected to an assigned extension. Outside (CO) line 1: extension jack 01 Outside (CO) line 4: extension jack 09 Outside (CO) line 7: extension jack 17 Only outside (CO) line calls are possible during a power failure. All other features will not function. We recommend connecting an SLT in parallel at extension jacks 01, 09, and 17, so that the SLT can be used during a power failure. Automobile-type batteries, which must be user-supplied, can be connected as a system backup power supply to operate all the features during a power failure. The batteries can be connected directly to the unit with optional cables. For more information, refer to the Installation Manual.

2.2.6 Connecting Backup Batteries 2.9 Power Failure Connections

1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone
Feature Guide
183
2.4 Fault Recovery/Diagnostics
2.4.2
Power Failure Restart
Description
When the electricity is turned back on, the PBX restarts and automatically loads stored data.
Conditions
In the event of a power failure, PBX memory is protected by a factory-installed lithium battery. There is no memory loss except the memories of Automatic Callback Busy ( 1.7.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)), Call Park ( 1.12.2 Call Park), and Redial ( 1.6.1.4 Redial).
184
Feature Guide
Section
Programming Instructions
Feature Guide
185
3.1 Introduction
3.1
3.1.1
Introduction
Introduction
These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the Panasonic Advanced Hybrid System. The PBX has default settings that can be changed to meet your needs. These settings control the manner in which the PBX features described in this Feature Guide function, and changing these settings is referred to as "system programming". System programming can be performed by only one person at a time. A second person attempting to programme the system will be denied access to system programming.
Ways to Programme
There are 2 programming methods: PC Programming PC programming is described in Section 3.2 PC Programming. PT (Proprietary Telephone) Programming PT programming is described in Section 3.3 PT Programming. An authorised administrator or the manager can perform system programming by entering 3-digit programming numbers with a PT.
Password Security
To maintain system security, a password is required to perform system programming. When KX-TE Maintenance Console is started for the first time, the Quick Setup utility will ask you to set the system password. To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling, do not disclose the password. Warning to the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password
1. Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible dangers if it
becomes known to others.
2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling, maintain the secrecy of the
password.
3. We strongly recommend that you change the default password value to something else for reasons
of system security. It is best to use a password of 7 digits.
4. Please change the password periodically. 5. If a system password is forgotten, it can be found by loading a backup of the system data into a
PC, and checking the password using the KX-TE Maintenance Console software. If you do not have a backup of the system data, you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and reprogramme it. Therefore, we strongly recommend maintaining a backup of the system data. For more information on how to back up the system data, refer to the on-line help that appears by selecting the Help menu during PC programming. However, as system passwords can be extracted from backup copies of the system data file, do not allow unauthorised access to these files. Note This PBX has only one system password. It can be changed by either PT programming or PC programming. For this reason, the password can consist of numerals only.
186
Feature Guide
3.2 PC Programming
3.2
3.2.1
PC Programming
Installing and Starting KX-TE Maintenance Console
To programme and administer the PBX by PC (Personal Computer), you need to install KX-TE Maintenance Console onto the PC. To install and start KX-TE Maintenance Console when the PC and the PBX are connected, refer to the Installation Manual ( 3.1.1 Installing KX-TE Maintenance Console on a PC). KXTE Maintenance Console starts the programme using the drive where you installed the software automatically.
System Requirements
Operating System Microsoft Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP Hardware CPU: 133 MHz Intel Pentium or faster RAM: At least 64 megabytes (MB) of available RAM (128 MB recommended) Hard disk space: At least 100 MB of space for the installation, and approximately 2 MB of additional space for user files.
Feature Guide
187
3.3 PT Programming
3.3
3.3.1
PT Programming
Programming Instructions
Required Telephone
PBX settings can be customised through system programming by using a proprietary telephone (PT) with a display, such as the KX-T7730. An authorised administrator or the manager extension connected to the extension jack 01 can access system programming. Only one system programming session can be performed at a time; that is, only one user can access system programming at a time. This includes PC programming.
Buttons and Functions

Fixed Button (KX-T7730/KX-T7735) Function PREV (PREVIOUS)
NEXT

SECRET
STORE
PAUSE
PROGRAM
END
SELECT
188
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Fixed Button (KX-T7730/KX-T7735)
Function FLASH
CLEAR
Entering System Programming Mode

Using a PT to perform system programming allows an authorised administrator to set a wide range of PBX features and parameters. To enter system programming mode, the system password is required. With the system password, all system programming is accessible.
#
PROGRAM
System Password for Administratorfor PT Programming 1234
Programming No.
3 digits
Note means default value throughout these programming instructions.
Entering Manager Programming Mode

Using a PT to perform manager programming allows the manager extension (extension jack 01) to set certain PBX features and parameters. To enter manager programming mode, the extension password for the manager (manager password) is required. With the manager password, the following 4 system programming settings are accessible: System Speed Dialling Number [001] System Speed Dialling Name [011] DISA Security Code [512] DISA Security Code Digits [530]
#
PROGRAM
Extension Password for Manager for PT Programming
Programming No.
3 digits
Notes
The system password may be entered instead of the manager password. With the manager password, the manager can also set a password to each extension, and print out call log information for each extension. For more information on how to assign a password to each extension including the manager password and to print out call log information for each extension, refer to the User Manual ( 2.1.7 Changing System Settings Using Programming Mode, 3.2.2 Viewing, Printing, and Clearing Call Logs).
Feature Guide
189
3.3 PT Programming
Entering Characters
The PT's dialling buttons can be used to enter characters when storing a name or message. The following tables depict the available characters: Table 1 (Alphabet mode)/Table 2 (Numeral mode)
190
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Table 3 (Cyrillic alphabet mode for RU [Russia]/UA [Ukraine] model)
* This character is only available for the KX-T7735RU. [Example of Entering Characters] To enter "Ann":
(5 times)
OR
(5 times)
Notes
To toggle between "Alphabet mode" and "Numeral mode" or between "Alphabet mode", "Cyrillic alphabet mode (assignable only in Extension Name in Cyrillic [616] )", and "Numeral mode", press SELECT. To move the cursor right, press . .
To delete all characters, press CLEAR. To delete a character, press
Feature Guide
191
3.3 PT Programming
List of Abbreviations
A
AA APT ARS Automated Attendant Analogue Proprietary Telephone Automatic Route Selection Background Music Built-in Voice Message Outside (CO) Line Class of Service Calling Party Control Direct In Line Direct Inward System Access Do Not Disturb Distinctive Ring Detection Direct Station Selection Dual Tone Multi-Frequency External Feature Access Group Intercept RoutingNo Answer Live Call Screening Outgoing Message Proprietary Telephone Single Line Telephone Station Message Detail Recording Short Message Service Toll Restriction Telephone Answering Machine Uniform Call Distribution Voice Mail
B C
BGM BV CO COS CPC
DIL DISA DND DRD DSS DTMF
E G I L O P S
EFA GRP IRNA LCS OGM PT SLT SMDR SMS
T U V
TRS TAM UCD VM
192
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
3.3.2
Notes
Programming Procedures
means default value throughout these programming instructions. means to select "All" throughout these programming instructions. The following are displayed when you store a number, such as a telephone number, or feature number: P: PAUSE; -: CONF; F: FLASH/RECALL; [ ]: INTERCOM x: PAUSE (substitutes for any number [i.e., wild card]) To return to the previous programming item, press . To correct a wrong entry, press CLEAR and then enter the new input. To delete a stored parameter, press CLEAR, enter the new input, and then press STORE. Press or to scroll the display. Some programmes cannot have a value left empty.
Date & Time [000]
NEXT
year (0099)
minute (0059)
SELECT
SELECT
day (131)
STORE
END
(Jan.Dec.)
SELECT
hour (112)
(SunSat)
Notes
(AM/PM)
The clock starts immediately after the STORE button is pressed. The PBX supports years from 2004 to 2099.
Feature & Programming References 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
System Speed Dialling Number [001]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
speed dialling no.
phone no.
STORE
END
(0099)
Max. 32 digits (09, , #, P, , F, [ ])

To continue
SELECT
Notes
An Outside (CO) Line Access number (9/0 [for New Zealand: 1 or 9], 81 through 88) should be included before the phone number.
Feature Guide
193
3.3 PT Programming
When storing an account code assigned in Account Code [310], enter after an Outside (CO) Line Access number.
and the account code
Feature & Programming References 1.6.1 Memory Dialling Features
System Password [002]
NEXT
password
STORE
END
4-7 digits (00009999999) 1234
WARNING
To maintain system security, a password is required to perform system programming. To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling, do not disclose the password.
Warning to the Administrator regarding the system password
1. Please inform the customer of the importance of the password and the possible dangers if it
becomes known to others.
2. To avoid unauthorised access and possible fraudulent dialling, maintain the secrecy of the
password.
3. We strongly recommend that you change the default password value to something else for reasons
of system security. It is best to use a password of 7 digits.
4. Please change the password periodically. 5. If a system password is forgotten, it can be found by loading a backup of the system data into a
PC, and checking the password using the KX-TE Maintenance Console software. If you do not have a backup of the system data, you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and reprogramme it. Therefore, we strongly recommend maintaining a backup of the system data. For more information on how to back up the system data, refer to the on-line help that appears by selecting the Help menu during PC programming. However, as system passwords can be extracted from backup copies of the system data file, do not allow unauthorised access to these files. Note This PBX has only one system password. It can be changed by either PT programming or PC programming. For this reason, the password can consist of numerals only. Feature & Programming References 2.3.1 PC Programming 2.3.2 PT Programming
194
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
DSS Console Jack Assignment [003]
NEXT
DSS console no.
extension jack no.
STORE
To continue
END
(12)
(0224/Disable)
NEXT
or
PREV
Notes
To delete (disable) an extension jack number, press CLEAR in the extension jack number step. The same jack number cannot be assigned to 2 DSS Consoles. Do not assign extension jack 01 (manager extension) as the DSS Console jack. The extension jack number preassigned as a paired telephone in Console Paired Telephone [004] should not be assigned in this programme.
Feature & Programming References 1.18.1 Fixed Buttons 2.1.1 Extension Jack Configuration
Console Paired Telephone [004]
NEXT
DSS console no.
extension jack no.
STORE
To continue
END
(12)
(0124/Disable)
NEXT
or
PREV
Notes
To delete (disable) an extension jack number, press CLEAR in the extension jack number step. The extension jack number preassigned as a DSS Console in DSS Console Jack Assignment [003] should not be assigned in this programme. An SLT cannot be paired with the DSS Console.
Feature & Programming References 1.18.1 Fixed Buttons 2.1.1 Extension Jack Configuration
One-touch Transfer Using a DSS Button [005]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(With Transfer/ Without Transfer)
Feature Guide
195
3.3 PT Programming
Note With Transfer: Press the DSS button to transfer an outside (CO) line call. Without Transfer: Press the TRANSFER button, then the DSS button to transfer an outside (CO) line call. Feature & Programming References 1.11.1 Call Transfer 1.18.1 Fixed Buttons
Time Service Switching Mode [006]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Manual/Automatic)
Feature & Programming References 2.2.3 Time Service Time Service Start Time [007]
Time Service Start Time [007]
NEXT
NEXT
or PREV
or
SELECT
(SunSat)
(Every day) (Day/Night/ Lunch-start/ Lunch-end)

To go to another mode
To go to another day of the week
* hour or SELECT (112)
minute (0059)
SELECT
STORE
END
(AM/PM)
To remain the settings unchanged, keep pressing SELECT until "None" is displayed
Notes
This programme is available when switching mode is enabled in automatic mode in Time Service Switching Mode [006]. * Pressing SELECT shows the previous entry. When the display shows "None", press SELECT to set the start time.
Feature & Programming References 2.2.3 Time Service
Operator Assignment [008]
NEXT
extension jack no.
STORE
END
(0124/Disable)
196
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Note To delete (disable) an extension jack number, press CLEAR in the extension jack number step. Feature & Programming References 2.2.4 Operator/Manager Features
Extension Number [009]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
(Plan 1/2/3)
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
extension no.
STORE
To continue
END
(0124)
SELECT
Notes
Programmable extension numbers are as follows: Plan 1: 100199; Plan 2: 100499; Plan 3: 1049 (for United Kingdom/New Zealand: Plan 1: 200299; for New Zealand: Plan 2: 200499, Plan 3: 2049) The same extension jack number cannot be entered 2 times.
Feature & Programming References 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call 1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling 1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration 2.3.4 Feature Numbering
LCD Time Display [010]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(12/24 h)
Note The following settings and features use 12-hour format even if 24-hour format is assigned in this programme: Date & Time [000] Time Service Start Time [007] 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 1.21.2 Timed Reminder
Feature Guide
197
3.3 PT Programming
System Speed Dialling Name [011]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
speed dialling no.
name*
STORE
To continue
END
(0099)
Max. 16 characters
SELECT
Note * A name can be stored using a PT's dialling buttons. The displayed character varies depending on the number of times that the dialling button is pressed. It is possible to toggle between "Alphabet mode" and "Numeral mode" by pressing SELECT. Feature & Programming References 1.6.1.5 Speed DiallingPersonal/System 3.3.1 Programming InstructionsEntering Characters
Second Feature Numbering Plan [012]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
code no.
feature no.
STORE
To continue
END
(5059)
Max. 10 digits (09, , #, P, , F, [ ])

SELECT
Note This programme is available only when "Plan 2" or "Plan 3" is selected in Extension Number [009]. Feature & Programming References 1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling 2.3.4 Feature Numbering
198
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling [013]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
location no.
feature no.
STORE
END
(19)
Max. 24 digits (09, , #, P, , F, [ ])

To continue
SELECT
Notes
Any feature number can be stored in a One-touch button. However, the feature numbers for Personal Speed Dialling, System Speed Dialling, and Quick Dialling do not function. This feature is not available when the KX-T7710 is connected in parallel with a PT.
Feature & Programming References 1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling
Hunting Group Set [100]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension group no.
name* SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(18/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting Extension Group [600]
Hunting Type [101]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension group no.
name* SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(18/
(Terminate/ Circular)
SELECT
Note This programme is available when the extension group is enabled in Hunting Group Set [100].
Feature Guide
199
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting
DTMF Integration Port [102]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
name* SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(07, 08, 15, 16/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration
DTMF Integration [103]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Note When a KX-TVP series VPS is connected to the PBX, to enable Inband (DTMF) Integration between the VPS and the PBX, select "Plan 1" or "Plan 2" in Extension Number [009] and "Enable" in this programme. Feature & Programming References 1.19.2 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration DTMF Integration Port [102]
SLT Hold Mode [104]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Hold-1/Hold-2/ Hold-3)
Feature & Programming References 1.12.1 Call Hold
Conference Tone [105]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References 1.7.2 Executive Busy Override 1.13.1.2 Conference
200
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
External Pager Access Tone [106]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References 1.14.1 Paging
DTMF Receiver Check [107]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
DTMF receiver no.
name* SELECT
STORE
END
(16/
(Enable/Disable)
Note This programme enables each DTMF receiver to check whether it is operating normally or not. DTMF receiver number: 12: checking extension jacks 0108 34: checking extension jacks 0916 56: checking extension jacks 1724 Connection References 4.1.3 Operation
Flash/Recall Mode for a Locked Extension [108]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Note This programme enables a locked extension to send a flash/recall signal during a conversation with an outside party.
CO Indicator [109]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Note This programme is available for the extension(s) assigned not to ring in Flexible RingingDay/Night/ Lunch [408-410], to answer incoming outside (CO) line calls.
Feature Guide
201
3.3 PT Programming
Flash/Recall Key Mode [110]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(MODE1: EFA mode/ MODE2: Flash/Recall mode)

Feature & Programming References 1.10.6 Flash/Recall 1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
Music on Hold [111]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Internal/ External/Tone)
Note Selections vary depending on your country/area. Feature & Programming References 1.12.4 Music on Hold 1.15.4 Background Music (BGM)
DSS Lamp Mode [112]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Note Enable: FWDFlashing slowly, DNDFlashing at moderate speed Disable: FWDOff, DNDOff Feature & Programming References 1.18.3 LED Indication
Automatic Redial Repeat Count [113]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(0/3/10/ 15 times)
Feature & Programming References 1.6.1.4 Redial
202
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Automatic Redial Interval [114]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(40/60 s)
Feature & Programming References 1.6.1.4 Redial
Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Single/Double/ Triple)
Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
Conference Pattern [116]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(3-party C-0 E-3/ 3-party C-1 E-3/ 3-party C-2 E-3/ 5-party C-2 E-5)
Note 3-party C-0 E-3: No outside parties can attend a 3-party conference call. 3-party C-1 E-3: One outside party can attend a 3-party conference call. 3-party C-2 E-3: A maximum of 2 outside parties can attend a 3-party conference call. 5-party C-2 E-5: A maximum of 2 outside parties can attend a 3-party to 5-party conference call. The PBX allows up to 2 outside parties to participate in a conference call. [C: CO, E: Extension] Feature & Programming References 1.13.1.2 Conference
Call Pickup Tone [117]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
Feature Guide
203
3.3 PT Programming
Pulse Restriction [118]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Note It is programmable whether pulse dialling is sent or not to the telephone company during a conversation with an outside party when "Pulse" or "Call Block" mode is enabled in Dial Mode [401].
Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion [119]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection
Bell Frequency [120]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(20/25 Hz)
Note This programme selects the bell frequency sent to an SLT.
Automatic Line Access [121]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Dial 0/9)*
Note * For New Zealand: 1 or 9 Feature & Programming References 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access 2.2.4 Operator/Manager Features
Automatic Rotation for CO Line Access [122]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
204
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Break Ratio [123]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(MODE1: 66 %/ MODE2: 60 %)
Note This programme selects the pulse break ratio (the ratio between the length of the pulse and the length of the pause) when a pulse is sent to the telephone company while dialling a telephone number.
TRS Check for * and # [125]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
DSS Off-hook Mode [126]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call
Pickup Group [127]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension group no.
name* SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(18/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup CO Indicator [109]
Ringback Tone Pattern [128]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Single 3 s/Single 5 s/ Double 3 s/Double 5 s)
Feature Guide
205
3.3 PT Programming
Note This programme selects the ringback tone pattern for outgoing intercom calls and for incoming outside (CO) line calls (including a DISA call). Feature & Programming References 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
VM 1 APT Port [130]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Port7/Port7 & 8/ Disable)

Notes
To change the current setting (other than "Disable"), select "Disable", then select the desired setting. This programme is not available when "Enable" is selected in DTMF Integration [103].
Feature & Programming References 1.19.1 Voice Mail APT Integration
VM 2 APT Port [131]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Port15/ Port15 & 16/ Disable)

Notes
To change the current setting (other than "Disable"), select "Disable", then select the desired setting. This programme is not available when "Enable" is selected in DTMF Integration [103].
SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(1:2/1:3/1:4) [On:Off]
Note This programme selects the ratio between the bell signals of an SLT (a set of bell-on and bell-off).
206
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143]
SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(10002000 ms) [100 ms increments]

Notes
This programme selects the length of the bell-on signal of an SLT. This determines the ring tone pattern for incoming calls to SLTs, combined with the setting in SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142]. This programme also determines the maximum number of digits of an SLT Caller ID number, when "DTMF1" or "DTMF2" is selected in SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150].
Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 1.16.1 Caller ID
SMS Centre Number for Receiving [145]
NEXT
SMS centre no.
STORE
END
Max. 16 digits (09, , #)

Feature & Programming References 1.17.3 Call Routing for Fixed Line SMS
SMS Routing TableCO [146]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
CO line no.
name* SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(18)
(Disable/18)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.17.3 Call Routing for Fixed Line SMS
Feature Guide
207
3.3 PT Programming
SMS Routing TableExtension [147]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124)
(Disable/18)
SELECT
Note Each location 18 has a maximum of 8 extensions. Feature & Programming References 1.17.3 Call Routing for Fixed Line SMS
SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(FSK1 [During ring]/ FSK2 [RP-AS]/ DTMF1 [Immediately]/ DTMF2 [During ring])
Feature & Programming References 1.16.1 Caller ID
SLT Caller ID Line Access Number [151]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Automatic Time Adjustment [152]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References 2.3.3 Automatic Time Adjustment
Incoming Reverse [153]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
208
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References 1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
Hold Recall Time [200]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(30 s/ 1/1.5/2/3/4/5/6 min/ Disable)

Feature & Programming References 1.12.1 Call Hold 1.12.2 Call Park
Transfer Recall Time [201]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(15/30 s/ 1/2 min)

Feature & Programming References 1.11.1 Call Transfer
Call Forwarding Start Time [202]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(5/10/15/ 20 s delay)
Feature & Programming References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Hot Line Waiting Time [203]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(04 s)
Feature & Programming References 1.6.1.7 Hot Line
Call Duration Counter Start [204]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(5/10/15/20/25/30/35/ 40/45/50 s after dialling/ Instantly)

Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.5 Reverse Circuit 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Feature Guide
209
3.3 PT Programming
Polarity Reverse Detection [424]
CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205]
NEXT
time (132 min)
STORE
END
Feature & Programming References 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation
Dialling Start Time [206]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
Refer to the note.*
Note * The minimum length of time that the PBX waits after seizing an outside (CO) line before dialling that can be selected depends on your country/area as follows: For Czech Republic: 0 ms, 250 ms, 500 ms, 750 ms, 1000 ms, 1250 ms, 3500 ms For Others: 0 ms, 250 ms, 500 ms, 750 ms, 1000 ms, 1250 ms, 1500 ms Feature & Programming References 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(MODE1: 50-180 ms/ MODE2: 80-180 ms/ MODE3: 80-650 ms/ MODE4: 80-1000 ms/ MODE5: 200-1000 ms)
Feature & Programming References 1.12.1 Call Hold
Inter-digit Time [208]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(5/10/15/20 s)
Feature & Programming References 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS) No Dial Disconnection [211]
210
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
DTMF Time [210]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(MODE1: 80 ms/ MODE2: 160 ms)

Note This programme selects the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to outside (CO) lines that have been set to "DTMF" in Dial Mode [401]. Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection
No Dial Disconnection [211]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS) Inter-digit Time [208]
Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212]
NEXT
time (132 min)
STORE
END
Note This programme is available for the extension(s) enabled in CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613]. Feature & Programming References 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation
Bell-off Detection [213]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(3/6/12 s)
Note This programme selects the minimum time required by the PBX to confirm that the bell signal is no longer being sent from the telephone company, before the PBX acknowledges that the call is lost.
BV Recording Time [214]
NEXT
time
STORE
END
(120 min)
Feature Guide
211
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
Common/Personal BV OGM Recording Time [215]
NEXT
time
STORE
END
(115 min)
Note This programme selects the maximum recording time for each personal/common BV OGM. Feature & Programming References 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
Carrier Exception Code [300]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
code no.
carrier code
STORE
To continue
END
(0120)
Max. 10 digits (09, , #, x)

SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS) 1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
TRSSystem Speed Dialling Class [301]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Class-15)
Feature & Programming References 1.6.1.5 Speed DiallingPersonal/System 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
TRSCOS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
X
(0205)
NEXT
code no.
phone no.
STORE
To continue
END
(0120)
02: for Class 2 03: for Class 3 04: for Class 4 05: for Class 5
Max. 11 digits (09, , #, x)

SELECT
212
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
TRSException Code [306]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
code no.
phone no.
STORE
To continue
END
(0180)
Max. 11 digits (09, , #, x)

SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS) TRSCOS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305]
Emergency Number [309]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
code no.
emergency no.
STORE
To continue
END
(15)
Max. 24 digits (09)

SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.2 Emergency Call 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)
Account Code [310]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
code no.
account code
STORE
To continue
END
(0150)
4 digits (09)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry 1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code Account Code Mode [605]
Feature Guide
213
3.3 PT Programming
Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
code no.
pause code
STORE
To continue
END
(0140)
Max. 11 digits (09)

SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.6 Pause Insertion Pause Time [417]
TRSExtension Lock Class [312]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(COS-25/ Disable)
Feature & Programming References 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS) 1.8.3 Extension Lock
ARS Selection [350]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
CO line no.
name* SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(18/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
X
(5154)
NEXT
code no.
area code
STORE
To continue
END
(0180)
51: for Route 1 52: for Route 2 53: for Route 3 54: for Route 4
Max. 7 digits (09, , #, x)

SELECT
214
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
X
(5558)
NEXT
code no.
area code
STORE
To continue
END
(0180)
Max. 7 digits (09, , #, x)

SELECT
1st Carrier Selection Code [359]
NEXT
first carrier access code
STORE
END
Max. 4 digits (09)

ARS ModificationRemoved Digits [360]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
route no.
removed digits
STORE
To continue
END
(14)
(09)
SELECT
Feature Guide
215
3.3 PT Programming
ARS ModificationAdded Number [361]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
route no.
added number
STORE
To continue
END
(14)
Max. 20 digits (09, , #, P)

SELECT
ARS Dial Tone [362]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Tone1/Tone2/ Tone3/Disable)
Feature & Programming References 1.22.1 Dial Tone
ARS Inter-digit Time [363]
NEXT
time (120 s)
STORE
END
Note This assignment should be the same as the inter-digit timer assigned in Inter-digit Time [208]. Feature & Programming References 1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
ARS CO Line Group [364]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
route no.
CO line group no.
STORE
To continue
END
(14)
(18/
SELECT
Note The assignments in Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354] are effective for this programme.
216
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
X
(8184)
NEXT
CO line no.
authorisation code
STORE
To continue
END
(18/
Max. 19 digits (09, , #, P)

SELECT
Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
X
(8588)
NEXT
CO line no.
name* SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(18/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Itemised Billing Code [389]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
itemised billing code
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
Max. 3 digits (09, , #, P)

SELECT
Feature Guide
217
3.3 PT Programming
Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order [390]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
route no.
name* STORE SELECT
END
(14/
(C.A.I.H/ C.I.A.H)
SELECT
To continue
Note C: Carrier Access Code; A: Authorisation Code; I: Itemised Billing Code; H: Telephone Number Feature & Programming References 1.9.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
CO Line Connection [400]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
CO line no.
name* SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(18/
(Connect/ Not connect)

SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.5.3.2 Line PreferenceOutgoing 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
Dial Mode [401]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
CO line no.
name* SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(18/
(DTMF/Pulse/ Call Block mode)

SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection
218
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Pulse Speed [402]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
CO line no.
name* SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(18/
) (Low Speed: 10 pps/ High Speed: 20 pps)

SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.4 Dial Type Selection Dial Mode [401]
Host PBX Access Code [403]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
CO line no.
access code
STORE
END
(18/
Up to 8 access codes 1 or 2 digits To continue (09, , #)

SELECT
Note Insert "," (CONF/MESSAGE button) between each access code using the comma button on the overlay. For example, to store access codes 81 and 82 on outside (CO) line 1, programme as follows: 403 NEXT 1 81,82 STORE END Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) Pause Time [417]
CO Line Group Number [404]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
CO line no.
CO line group no.
STORE
To continue
END
(18/
(18)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
Feature Guide
219
3.3 PT Programming
2.2.2 Group
Flexible Outward DiallingDay/Night/Lunch [405-407]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
Go to next or prev. line number
or
To continue
Go to next or prev. jack number
X
(0507)
NEXT
CO line no.
extension jack no. SELECT
STORE
END
(18/
(0124/
05: for day 06: for night 07: for lunch
(Enable/ Disable)
To continue Go to another jack number
SELECT
To continue Go to another line number
Note It is impossible to disable all extensions for all outside (CO) lines in each time service mode (day/night/ lunch). In each mode, at least one extension must be allowed to make an outside (CO) line call. Feature & Programming References 1.5.3.2 Line PreferenceOutgoing 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access
Flexible RingingDay/Night/Lunch [408-410]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
or
To continue
X
(0810)
NEXT
CO line no.
STORE
END
(18/
(0124/
(Enable/ Disable)
To continue
SELECT
Go to another jack number To continue Go to another line number
220
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.2 Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection 1.4.1.2 Line PreferenceIncoming
Delayed RingingDay/Night/Lunch [411-413]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
or
To continue
X
(1113)
NEXT
CO line no.
STORE
END
(18/
(0124/
Refer to the note.*
To continue Go to another jack number To continue SELECT Go to another line number
Note * The ringing start time that can be selected for extension(s) selected in Flexible RingingDay/Night/ Lunch [408-410] depends on your country/area as follows: For United Kingdom: Immediately, 10 s, 20 s, 30 s For Others: Immediately, 5 s, 10 s, 15 s Feature & Programming References 1.2.3 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring 1.4.1.2 Line PreferenceIncoming
CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416]

<To select Normal, UCD, and/or MODEM>
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
X
(1416)
NEXT
CO line no.
name* SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(18/
(Normal/UCD/ MODEM)
SELECT
Feature Guide
221
3.3 PT Programming
<To select BV>

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
X
(1416)
NEXT
CO line no.
name* SELECT common BV OGM no. STORE name*
END
(18/
(BV)
SELECT
(0124)
To continue
<To select DISA>

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
X
(1416)
NEXT
CO line no.
name* SELECT
DISA OGM no.
STORE
END
(18/
(DISA)
SELECT
(18)
To continue
<To select DIL>

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
X
(1416)
NEXT
CO line no.
name* SELECT
extension jack no.
STORE
END
(18/
(DIL)
SELECT
(0124)
To continue
Notes
When you select "UCD", it is necessary to assign an extension group as the UCD group in UCD Group [520]. After you select "BV", do not change Operator Assignment [008].
Feature & Programming References 1.1.1.1 Direct In Line (DIL) 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV) 2.3.1 PC Programming Flexible RingingDay/Night/Lunch [408-410]
222
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Pause Time [417]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
CO line no.
name* SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(18/
(1.5/2.5/ 3.5/4.5 s)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.6 Pause Insertion 1.5.2.7 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311] Host PBX Access Code [403]
Flash/Recall Time [418]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
CO line no.
name* SELECT
STORE
END
(18/
(80/100/160/ 300/600/900/ 1200 ms)

SELECT
To continue
Feature & Programming References 1.10.6 Flash/Recall 1.10.7 External Feature Access (EFA)
Automatic Designated Line Access [419]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
CO line no.
name* SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(18/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.5.3.2 Line PreferenceOutgoing 1.5.3.3 Outside (CO) Line Access Automatic Line Access [121]
Feature Guide
223
3.3 PT Programming
CPC Signal DetectionIncoming [420]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
CO line no.
X
(0075)
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(18/
Note CPC signal detect time selection number: 00: Disable; 0175: 22614 ms (detect time: 8 ms increments) Feature & Programming References 1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
CPC Signal DetectionOutgoing [421]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
CO line no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(18/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Note When this programme is disabled, CPC Signal Detection is only activated during an incoming outside (CO) line call or after an outgoing outside (CO) line call is placed on hold. Feature & Programming References 1.10.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection
Disconnect Time [422]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
CO line no.
SELECT
Refer to the note.*
STORE
END
(18/
To continue
SELECT
224
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Notes
* The disconnect signal lengths that can be selected depend on your country/area as follows: For United Kingdom: 0.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s For South Africa: 0.8 s, 1.5 s, 4.0 s For Others: 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 4.0 s The time you select must be longer than the requirements of your telephone company or host PBX.
Feature & Programming References 1.10.6 Flash/Recall
CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
CO line no.
SELECT
STORE
END
(18/
(Single/Double/ Triple) To continue

SELECT
Note It is recommended that you set a different ring tone pattern from the ring tone patterns specified in Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115] and Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706]. Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Polarity Reverse Detection [424]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
CO line no.
SELECT
STORE
END
(18/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
To continue
Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.5 Reverse Circuit
Feature Guide
225
3.3 PT Programming
Collect Call Block [425] (Brazil only)

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
CO line no.
SELECT
STORE
END
(18/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
To continue
Note This programme enables the PBX to automatically reject collect calls from the telephone company.
Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only)

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
CO line no.
SELECT
STORE
END
(18/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
To continue
Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension AssignmentDay/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand only) DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension AssignmentDay/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand only)
226
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension AssignmentDay/Night/Lunch [427-429] (New Zealand only)

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
or
To continue
X
(2729)
NEXT
CO line no.
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
END
(18/
(0124/
) (Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Note This is effective only when the DRD feature is enabled in Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only). Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand
DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension AssignmentDay/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand only)

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
or
To continue
X
(3032)
NEXT
CO line no.
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
END
(18/
(0124/
) (Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Feature Guide
227
3.3 PT Programming
Note This is effective only when the DRD feature is enabled in Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only). Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand
DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434] (New Zealand only)

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
X
(3334)
NEXT
CO line no.
SELECT
STORE
END
(18/
33: for Pattern 2 34: for Pattern 3
(Single/Double/ Triple) To continue

SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.4 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand
DISA IRNA to BVDay/Night/Lunch [438-440]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
X
(3840)
NEXT
CO line no.
name* common BV OGM no. name*
STORE
END
(18/
)
SELECT
(BV0124/ Not Stored)
To continue
DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Without AA/ With AA)

Note Without AA: Available destinations are extension numbers assigned in Extension Number [009], Outside (CO) Line Access numbers (9/0 [for New Zealand: 1 or 9], 81 through 88), and the Operator Call number (0 or 9) With AA: Available destinations are numbers available in "Without AA" mode and numbers (0 through 9) assigned in DISA Built-in AA [501]
228
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Built-in AA [501]

NEXT
or
PREV extension jack no.
To continue
NEXT
AA no.
SELECT
(09)
(0124) or
extension group no.
STORE
END
(Jack/GRP/ 3-level AA/ Not Stored)
(18)
Note If you would like to use the Automatic Line Access number (9/0 [for New Zealand: 1 or 9]) and/or Operator Call number in AA mode, do not assign AA number(s) that correspond to Automatic Line Access or Operator Call numbers (9 and/or 0). Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
FAX Connection [503]
5
Notes
NEXT
extension jack no.
STORE
END
(0124/Disable)
To delete (disable) an extension jack number, press CLEAR in the extension jack number step. The assigned extension will automatically have the Data Line Security feature set.
DISA Delayed Answer Time [504]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(0/3/6/12 s)
DISA Wait Time after OGM [505]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(0/5/10/15 s)
Feature Guide
229
3.3 PT Programming
DISA Busy Mode [506]

<To select Disconnect or Call Waiting>
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Disconnect/ Call Waiting)

<To select DISA>
NEXT
SELECT
DISA OGM no.
STORE
END
(DISA)
Feature & Programming References 1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
(18)
DISA Intercept Mode [507]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Intercept/ Disconnect)
Feature & Programming References 1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 1.19 Voice Mail Features
DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(10/20/30/ 40/60/120 s)
Feature & Programming References 1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Intercept Mode [507]
DISA Ring Time after Intercept [509]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(10/20/30/ 40/60/120 s)
Feature & Programming References 1.1.1.2 Intercept Routing 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
230
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
DISA Intercept Mode [507] DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508]
DISA No Dial Mode [510]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
DISA Security Mode [511]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Trunk/All/ None Security)

Note Trunk Security: Requires the caller to enter a DISA security code assigned in DISA Security Code [512] before making an outside (CO) line call. All Security: Requires the caller to enter a DISA security code before making either an outside (CO) line or intercom call. No Security: Allows the caller to make either an outside (CO) line or intercom call without entering a DISA security code. Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Security Code [512]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
code no.
security code
STORE
To continue
END
(14)
410 digits (09)

SELECT
WARNING There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Call feature of DISA. The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX. To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a) Enabling DISA security (Trunk Security or All Security). b) Maintaining the secrecy of passwords. c) Selecting passwords that are complex and random, so that they cannot be easily guessed.
Feature Guide
231
3.3 PT Programming
d) Changing passwords regularly.

Note The number of digits for DISA security codes is selected in DISA Security Code Digits [530]. Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Security Mode [511]
Cyclic Tone Detection [513]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Disable/ 2/3/4 times)

Feature & Programming References 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
FAX Tone Detection [514]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(1/2 time(s))
Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) FAX Connection [503]
Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(3/6/9 s)
Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA No Dial Mode [510]
DISA Incoming Assignment [516]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
END
(0124/
(Enable/ Disable)
To continue
SELECT
232
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
DISA AA Wait Time [517]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(15 s)
Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Built-in AA [501]
DISA Tone after Security Code [518]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA Security Code [512]
OGM Mute Time [519]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(0/2/4/6 s)
UCD Group [520]
NEXT
extension group no.
STORE
END
(18)
Feature & Programming References 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 2.2.2 Group
UCD Busy Waiting Time [521]
NEXT
waiting time
SELECT
STORE
END
(132 min/159 s) (min/s)

Feature & Programming References 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) UCD Busy Mode [523]
Feature Guide
233
3.3 PT Programming
UCD OGM Message Interval Time [522]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(30 s/ 1/1.5/2 min)

Feature & Programming References 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) UCD Busy Waiting Time [521]
UCD Busy Mode [523]

<To select Intercept-Normal or Disconnect>
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Intercept-Normal/ Disconnect)
<To select Intercept-DISA or Disconnect-OGM>
NEXT
SELECT
DISA/UCD OGM no.
STORE
END
(Intercept-DISA/ Disconnect-OGM)
Feature & Programming References 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
(18)
UCD Intercept Mode [524]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
Feature & Programming References 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(10/20/30/ 40/60/120 s)
Feature & Programming References 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) UCD Intercept Mode [524]
UCD Ring Time after Intercept [526]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(10/20/30/ 40/60/120 s)
234
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) UCD Intercept Mode [524]
UCD Waiting Message [527]
NEXT
UCD OGM no.
STORE
END
(18/ Not Stored)

Feature & Programming References 1.2.2 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD
DISA Security Code Digits [530]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(410 digits)
Note When this setting is changed, DISA security codes that have already been assigned in DISA Security Code [512] will be cleared. Feature & Programming References 1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
DISA Ringback Tone [531]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Ringback Tone/ Hold Music)

3-level AA Assignment [540-549]

Go to another third AA number
NEXT
or PREV
Go to next or prev. third AA number To continue
extension jack no.
X
(4049)
NEXT
second AA no.
[
third SELECT AA no. name*

: Skip] 3-level AA/
(0124) or
extension group no.
STORE
END
(09) (09,
) (Jack/GRP/ Not Stored)
[40-49: AA no. 0-9]
(18)
Feature Guide
235
3.3 PT Programming
Notes
This programme is available only when "3-level AA" is selected for each AA number in DISA Builtin AA [501]. Only when you select " " as the third AA number, you can select "3-level AA" in the next step.
Clear All OGMs of DISA/UCD [599]
NEXT
STORE
END
Feature & Programming References 1.15.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD
Extension Group [600]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
extension group no.
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
)
SELECT
(18)
Feature & Programming References 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting 2.2.2 Group
TRS-COSDay/Night/Lunch [601-603]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
X
(0103)
NEXT
extension jack no.
COS no.
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
(15)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.8.1 Toll Restriction (TRS) 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS)
236
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Extension Name [604]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
extension name*
STORE
To continue
END
(0124)
Max. 10 characters
SELECT
Note * An extension name can be stored using a PT's dialling buttons. The displayed character varies depending on the number of times that the dialling button is pressed. It is possible to toggle between "Alphabet mode" and "Numeral mode" by pressing SELECT. Feature & Programming References 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call 3.3.1 Programming InstructionsEntering Characters
Account Code Mode [605]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
END
(0124/
) (Option/Forced/ Verify-All/Verify-Toll)
To continue
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.5.2.3 Account Code Entry 1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code Account Code [310]
Call Transfer to CO Line [606]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Feature Guide
237
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References 1.11.1 Call Transfer 1.13.1.2 Conference
Call Forwarding to CO Line [607]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD)
Executive Busy Override [608]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.7.2 Executive Busy Override
DND Override [609]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND)
238
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Parallelled Telephone [610]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.10.9 Parallelled Telephone
TAM Extension [611]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup
Room Monitor [612]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.10.2 Room Monitor
Feature Guide
239
3.3 PT Programming
CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.10.8 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212]
Internal Pulse Detection [614]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.12.1 Call Hold Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207]
LCD Language [615]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
) Refer to the note.*

SELECT
Notes
* The following languages are available for the LCD: English; Spanish; Portuguese; Russian; Greek; Czech; Hungarian; Slovak; Polish; Italian; Ukrainian Selections vary depending on your country/area. Russian display is only available for the KX-T7730/KX-T7735RU. When "Russian" or "Ukrainian" is selected in this programme, during intercom calls, the calling extension's name assigned in Extension Name in Cyrillic [616] is displayed at the called extension.
240
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
When another language is selected, the calling extension's name assigned in Extension Name [604] is displayed.
Extension Name in Cyrillic [616]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
extension name*
STORE
To continue
END
(0124)
Max. 10 characters
SELECT
Notes
* An extension name can be stored using a PT's dialling buttons. The displayed character varies depending on the number of times that the dialling button is pressed. It is possible to toggle between "Alphabet mode", "Cyrillic alphabet mode", and "Numeral mode" by pressing SELECT. Russian display is only available for the KX-T7730/KX-T7735RU.
Feature & Programming References 1.5.1.1 Intercom Call 3.3.1 Programming InstructionsEntering Characters LCD Language [615]
Message Waiting for Another Extension [618]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no. name* SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.17.1 Message Waiting
Feature Guide
241
3.3 PT Programming
SLT Message Waiting [619]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
LCS Recording Mode Set [620]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
) (Stop recording/ Keep recording)

SELECT
BV Resource [621]
NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
END
(0124/
(Resource 1/2)
To continue
SELECT
242
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
BV for Extension [622]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
BV Access Code through CO Line [625]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
voice message access code
STORE
To continue
END
(0124)
410 digits (09, #)

SELECT
Notes
A voice message access code should be different from the corresponding extension number. If the voice message access code is the same as an extension number, dialling that number will access the extension, not the voice message area. A code that starts with a number already assigned as another code cannot be used. For example, if you assign the codes "1234" and "12345", "12345" cannot be selected since "1234" will be recognised first.
BGM Control for APT [626]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.15.4 Background Music (BGM)
Feature Guide
243
3.3 PT Programming
SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call [627]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
(015 s)
SELECT
SLT Caller ID [628]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
(Disable/ Single/Double)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 1.16.1 Caller ID
244
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Doorphone RingingDay/Night/Lunch [700-702]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
Go to next or prev. doorphone number
or
To continue
X
(0002)
NEXT
doorphone no.
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
END
(14/
(0124/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
To continue Go to another doorphone number
Feature & Programming References 1.15.1 Doorphone Call
Door OpenerDay/Night/Lunch [703-705]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
Go to next or prev. door opener number
or
To continue
X
(0305)
NEXT
door opener no.
STORE
END
(14/
(0124/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
To continue Go to another door opener number
Feature & Programming References 1.15.2 Door Open
Feature Guide
245
3.3 PT Programming
Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
doorphone no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(14/
) (Single/Double/ Triple/S-Double)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.1.3.3 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 1.15.1 Doorphone Call
Doorphone Access Tone [707]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
doorphone no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(14/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.10.2 Room Monitor 1.15.1 Doorphone Call
Doorphone Ring Time [708]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
doorphone no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(14/
(15/30 s)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.15.1 Doorphone Call
246
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Door Open Duration [709]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
door opener no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(14/
(18 s)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.15.2 Door Open
Doorphone Ring/Chime [710]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
doorphone no.
name* SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(14/
(Ring/Chime/ Ring & Chime)

SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.15.3 Doorbell/Door Chime Doorphone RingingDay/Night/Lunch [700-702]
Doorphone Chime Assignment [711]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
doorphone no.
name* SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(14/
(Relay14)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.15.3 Doorbell/Door Chime Doorphone Ring/Chime [710]
Feature Guide
247
3.3 PT Programming
Doorphone Chime Pattern [712]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
doorphone no.
name* SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(14/
(Pattern18)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.15.3 Doorbell/Door Chime 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones
SMDR RS-232C Parameter [800]

<Select the new line code> <Select the baud rate>
NEXT SELECT STORE
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
(CR+LF/CR)
CR: Carriage Return LF: Line Feed
(1200/2400/ 4800/9600 B) <Select the stop bit length>

NEXT SELECT STORE END
<Select the word length>

NEXT SELECT STORE
<Select the parity>

NEXT SELECT STORE
(7/8 bits)
(Mark/Space/ Even/Odd/ None*)
(1 bit/2 bits)
Notes
* Select "None" when the printer does not require error checking. The following combinations are invalid. Parity Mark Space Space Word length 8 8 8 Stop bit length 2 1 2
If any of the above invalid combinations are selected, an alarm tone will be heard. Feature & Programming References 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
248
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
SMDR Parameter [801]

<Select the page length> (499 lines) <Select the skip perforation>
NEXT skip perforation STORE END
NEXT
page length
STORE
(095 lines)
Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802]

<Select an outgoing call> <Select an incoming call>
NEXT SELECT STORE END
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
(On/Off/Toll)
(On/Off)
Note Outgoing Call: On (Print all calls)/Off (No printing)/Toll (Print toll calls only) Incoming Call: On (Print all calls)/Off (No printing) Feature & Programming References 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) TRSCOS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305]
Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression [803]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(No Printing/ Printing)

Feature & Programming References 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) System Speed Dialling Number [001]
System Data Dump [804]

<To select All parameters, System parameter, Speed dial, and/or Stop output>
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(All para/ System para/ Speed dial/ Stop output)
To continue
Feature Guide
249
3.3 PT Programming
<To select the CO (outside line) parameter>
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
CO line no.
STORE
To continue
END
(CO para)
(18/
<To select the Extension parameter>
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
extension jack no.
STORE
To continue
END
(Extn. para)
<To select the DSS parameter>
(0124/
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
DSS console no.
STORE
To continue
END
(DSS para)
(12/
SMDR Account Code [805]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(CODE/INDEX)
Feature & Programming References 1.8.2 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Account Code [310] Account Code Mode [605]
SMDR Language [806]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
Refer to the note.*
Note * The following languages are available for SMDR: English; Spanish; Portuguese; Greek; Czech; Hungarian; Slovak; Polish; Italian Selections vary depending on your country/area. Feature & Programming References 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
BV Total Recording Time [807]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(20/30/60 min)
250
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Note The recording quality depends on the setting time. 20 (min): High; 30: Normal; 60: Low Feature & Programming References 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
BV Card Initialisation [808]
NEXT
STORE
END
Note When this programme is performed, the PBX is reset. Feature & Programming References 1.15.7 Built-in Voice Message (BV)
Caller ID [900]
NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
CO line no.
name* SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(18/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Note The DISA Delayed Answer Time for the outside (CO) lines enabled here will always be 6 seconds even if "0 s" or "3 s" is selected in DISA Delayed Answer Time [504]. Feature & Programming References 1.16.1 Caller ID
Caller ID Area Code [901]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
code no.
area code
STORE
To continue
END
(15)
Max. 6 digits (09)

SELECT

Feature Guide 251
3.3 PT Programming
1.16.2 Incoming Call Log Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902]
Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902]

SELECT
To continue
<Select the removed digits>
NEXT
code no.
removed digits
STORE
END
(15)
(09) <Select the added number>
Feature & Programming References 1.16.1 Caller ID 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log Caller ID Area Code [901]
added number
STORE
END
Max. 4 digits (09, , #)
Caller ID Modification for Long-distance Calls [903]

<Select the removed digits>
NEXT
removed digits
STORE
END
(09) <Select the added number>
added number
STORE
END
Max. 4 digits (09, , #)

Feature & Programming References 1.16.1 Caller ID 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log
Caller ID Log Priority [904]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
(Name/ Number)
SELECT
Note This programme is available when the Caller ID service provides both a name and a number. If only the number is provided, this programme is not necessary.
252
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log 1.18.4 Display Information
Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition [905]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Caller ID SMDR Format [906]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Without CID: Not printed/ With CID: Printed)

Note Even if a name is also sent by the Caller ID service, only the number is printed. Feature & Programming References 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Caller ID SMDR Printout [907]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Common Area Call Log Check [909]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
Feature & Programming References 1.16.2 Incoming Call Log
Feature Guide
253
3.3 PT Programming
Caller ID Type [910]

NEXT
or
PREV
To continue
NEXT
CO line no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(18/
(FSK/DTMF)
SELECT
Call Log Next Page [927]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Note This programme enables the PBX to include page breaks when printing out call logs for each extension.
SMDR Mode for Printing [929]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(MODE 1/MODE 2)
Note Even if "On" (outgoing/incoming call) or "Toll" (outgoing call) is selected in Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802], when "MODE 2" is selected in this programme, the call log information is not displayed by SMDR, but the information for each extension is displayed by Call Log Printout. Feature & Programming References 1.20.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 1.20.2 Call Log Printout for Each Extension
Call Forwarding Selection [963]

NEXT
or PREV
To continue
NEXT
extension jack no.
SELECT
STORE
To continue
END
(0124/
(Enable/ Disable)
SELECT
254
Feature Guide
3.3 PT Programming
Feature & Programming References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416]
TRS Check after Answering [966]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Note This programme specifies whether the PBX checks DTMF signals when answering calls or not.
TRS Check Time after Answering [967]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(5/10/15/ 20/30/60 s)
Note This programme specifies the length of time that the DTMF signal is checked when "Enable" is selected in TRS Check after Answering [966].
KX-T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control [968]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(Enable/Disable)
Country [995]
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(NE: NE (ES)/NE (IT)) (CE: CE/CE (CZ))

Notes
This programme specifies your country/area when the suffix of the PBX is "NE" or "CE". For more information, please consult your dealer. When the country code is changed, all system data is initialised.
Feature & Programming References 2.3.6 Country Setting
Feature Guide
255
3.3 PT Programming
Firmware Version [998]
NEXT
SELECT
END
Display Example < ROM > < Firmware >
Y501A 040430 (BX)

SELECT
1.0.0
Version
Version
Date
Note You can confirm the ROM and the firmware version of the PBX alternately by pressing SELECT. Feature & Programming References 2.3.7 Firmware Upgrade
System Data Clear [999]

<To select All parameters, System parameter, and/or Speed Dial>
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
END
(All para/ System para/ Speed dial)
To continue
<To select the CO (outside line) parameter>
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
CO line no.
STORE
To continue
END
(CO para)
(18/
<To select the Extension parameter>
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
extension jack no.
STORE
To continue
END
(Extn. para)
<To select the DSS parameter>
(0124/
NEXT
SELECT
STORE
DSS console no.
STORE
To continue
END
(DSS para)
Feature & Programming References 2.3.2 PT Programming
(12/
256
Feature Guide
Section
Appendix
Feature Guide
257
4.1 Capacity of System Resources
4.1
4.1.1
Capacity of System Resources

Capacity of System Resources
Category System Item Outside (CO) Line Group Extension Group Absent Message Message Waiting Number of Characters of Name Extension Number Digits Call Park Zone Conference (5-party) Account Code Host PBX Access Code Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Intercom Call Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/ UCD KX-TES824/KX-TEM824 8 8 6 16 characters 8/extn. 10 2 or 3 10 1 4 digits, 50 entries 1 or 2 digits, 8 entries 64 calls 4 32 resources/PBX (8 resources for Direct Inward System Access [DISA]/ Uniform Call Distribution [UCD], 24 resources for 3-level Automated Attendant [AA]) 24 digits, 5 entries 10 digits, 10 entries 32 digits, 100 entries 24 digits, 10 entries/extn. 24 digits 32 digits 64 digits 7 digits, 80 entries 7 digits, 80 entries 4 5 11 digits, 80 entries 11 digits, 80 entries
Dialling
Emergency Call Quick Dialling System Speed Dialling Personal Speed Dialling One-touch Dialling Hot Line Redial
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Leading Number Table Leading Number Exception Table ARS Carrier
Toll Restriction (TRS)
Class of Service (COS) Denied Code Table Exception Code Table
258
Feature Guide
4.1 Capacity of System Resources
Category Call Log
Item Incoming Call Log
KX-TES824/KX-TEM824 20 entries/extn., 300 entries/PBX 125 voice messages/Built-in Voice Message (BV) resource
Password
System Password Extension Password Voice Message Access Code
47 digits 4 digits 410 digits
Feature Guide
259
4.2 Tones/Ring Tones
4.2
4.2.1
Tones/Ring Tones
Tones/Ring Tones
Tone Patterns
Dial Tone 1
Normal
1s
Dial Tone 2
Any of the following features is set: Absent Message Background Music (BGM) (proprietary telephone [PT] only) Call Forwarding (FWD) Call Pickup Deny Data Line Security Do Not Disturb (DND) Extension Lock Hot Line (single line telephone [SLT] only) Message Waiting (PT only) Remote Extension Lock Timed Reminder
Dial Tone 3
When going off-hook with an SLT that has messages waiting When Account Code Entry is performed When answering a call from Timed Reminder
Dial Tone 4
A new voice message has been recorded (Built-in Voice Message [BV]).
260
Feature Guide
Dial Tone 5
The remaining voice message recording time is less than 5 minutes or 125 voice messages have been recorded (Built-in Voice Message [BV]).
1s
Busy Tone
Reorder Tone
The outside (CO) line you tried to seize is not assigned or was denied.
Ringback Tones
Single (3-s interval)
Double (3-s interval)
Single (5-s interval)
Double (5-s interval)
DND Tone
The dialled extension is refusing incoming calls.
Call Waiting Tone 1
15 s
Call Waiting Tone 2

Single
1s
Double
Feature Guide
261
Triple
1s
Hold Alarm Tone

A call has been on hold for longer than the specified time.
15 s
Warning Tone (Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation)

This tone is sent 15 seconds before the specified time for disconnection.
1s
Confirmation Tone 1
The feature was set successfully, or the Extension Lock feature was set or cancelled.
Confirmation Tone 2
The new feature setting was the same as the previous setting, or certain features were successfully performed or accessed (e.g., Call Hold, Automatic Callback Busy).
Confirmation Tone 3
Before the following features activate: Retrieving a held call Picking up another call Establishing a conference Paging/Answering a paging announcement
262
Feature Guide
Ring Tone Patterns

Ring Tone Patterns
The following ring tone patterns can be assigned to incoming call types (outside (CO) line, intercom, or doorphone calls), or are fixed for certain call types (Hold Recall, Timed Reminder, or Camp-on Recall). Single (Incoming calls/Hold Recall [outside (CO) line calls]) Double (Incoming calls/Hold Recall [intercom calls]) Triple (Incoming calls/Timed Reminder) S-Double (Incoming calls [doorphone calls only]/Camp-on Recall)
1s
Ring Tone Patterns Sent from the Telephone Company (New Zealand only)
The following ring tone patterns sent from the telephone company can be detected for each outside (CO) line. Pattern 1
1s
Pattern 2
Pattern 3
Pattern 4
Feature Guide
263
Doorphone Chime Patterns

The following doorphone chime patterns can be assigned to each doorphone when doorbells and door chimes are connected to the PBX. Pattern 1*
1s
Pattern 2*
Pattern 3*
Pattern 4*
Pattern 5
Pattern 6
Pattern 7
Pattern 8
* Chime patterns 1 to 4 are played only one time during the doorphone ringing time.
264
Feature Guide
Index
Feature Guide
265
Index
Numerics
1st Carrier Selection Code [359] 215 2-way Recording into the VPS 144 3-level AA Assignment [540-549] 235 3-level Automated Attendant (AA) 105 3-party Conference 97 5-party Conference 97
BV Resource [621] 242 BV Total Recording Time [807] 250 BV > Built-in Voice Message (BV) 114
C
Call Duration Counter Start [204] 209 Call Forwarding (FWD) 31 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) 30 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 30 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)OVERVIEW 30 Call Forwarding Selection [963] 254 Call Forwarding Start Time [202] 209 Call Forwarding to CO Line [607] 238 Call Handling Features 13 Call Hold 90 Call Log Next Page [927] 254 Call Log Printout for Each Extension 154 Call Park 92 Call Park Recall 92 Call Pickup 37 Call Pickup Deny 37 Call Pickup Tone [117] 203 Call Retrieving from a Telephone Answering Machine (TAM) 37 Call Routing for Fixed Line SMS 129 Call Splitting 93 Call Transfer 88 Call Transfer to CO Line [606] 237 Call Transfer with Announcement 88 Call Transfer without Announcement 88 Call TransferScreened > Call Transfer with Announcement 88 Call TransferUnscreened > Call Transfer without Announcement 88 Call Waiting 22 Call Waiting Tone 63 Caller ID 119 Caller ID [900] 251 Caller ID Area Code [901] 251 Caller ID Automatic 0 Addition [905] 253 Caller ID Display on SLT 119 Caller ID Features 119 Caller ID Log Priority [904] 252 Caller ID Modification for Local Calls [902] 252 Caller ID Modification for Long-distance Calls [903] 252 Caller ID SMDR Format [906] 253 Caller ID SMDR Printout [907] 253 Caller ID Type [910] 254 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection 87 Capacity of System Resources 258 Carrier Exception Code [300] 212 Circular Hunting 23 Class of Service (COS) 161 Clear All OGMs of DISA/UCD [599] 236 CO Indicator [109] 201 CO Line Call Duration Limitation [613] 240 CO Line Connection [400] 218 CO Line Group Number [404] 219 CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416] 221 CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423] 225 Collect Call Block [425] (Brazil only) 226 Common Area Call Log Check [909] 253
A
Absent Message 128 Account Code [310] 213 Account Code Entry 43 Account Code Mode [605] 237 Administrative Information Output Features 149 Alternate CallingRing/Voice 39 Alternate ReceivingRing/Voice 39 Answering Features 35 Answering FeaturesOVERVIEW 35 Appendix 257 ARS CO Line Group [364] 216 ARS Dial Tone [362] 216 ARS Inter-digit Time [363] 216 ARS ModificationAdded Number [361] 216 ARS ModificationRemoved Digits [360] 215 ARS Selection [350] 214 ARS > Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 72 Audible Tone Features 157 Authorisation and Itemised Billing Code Order [390] 218 Authorisation Code 75 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) 61 Automatic Configuration for Outside (CO) Line Type 180 Automatic Designated Line Access [419] 223 Automatic Line Access (Local Access) 51 Automatic Line Access [121] 204 Automatic Pause Insertion Code [311] 214 Automatic Redial 57 Automatic Redial Interval [114] 203 Automatic Redial Repeat Count [113] 202 Automatic Rotation for CO Line Access [122] 204 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 72 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features 72 Automatic Time Adjustment 174 Automatic Time Adjustment [152] 208
B
Background Music (BGM) 104 Bell Frequency [120] 204 Bell-off Detection [213] 211 BGM Control for APT [626] 243 BGM > Background Music (BGM) 104 Break Ratio [123] 205 Built-in Voice Message (BV) 114 Busy Line/Busy Party Features 61 Busy Tone 261 Buttons and Functions 188 BV Access Code through CO Line [625] 243 BV Card Initialisation [808] 251 BV for Extension [622] 243 BV Recording Time [214] 211
266
Feature Guide
Index
Common BV OGM 114 Common/Personal BV OGM Recording Time [215] 212 Conference 97 Conference Features 96 Conference FeaturesOVERVIEW 96 Conference Pattern [116] 203 Conference Tone [105] 200 Confirmation Tone 158 Console Paired Telephone [004] 195 Consultation Hold 95 Conversation Features 78 COS > Class of Service (COS) 161 CO-to-CO Line Call Duration [205] 210 Country [995] 255 Country Setting 181 CPC Signal DetectionIncoming [420] 224 CPC Signal DetectionOutgoing [421] 224 CPC > Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection 87 Cyclic Tone Detection [513] 232
D
Data Line Security 82 Date & Time [000] 193 Delayed Ringing 28 Delayed RingingDay/Night/Lunch [411-413] 221 Denied Code Tables 64 Dial Mode [401] 218 Dial Tone 157 Dial Type Selection 44 Dialling Start Time [206] 210 DIL > Direct In Line (DIL) 14 Direct In Line (DIL) 14 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 106 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Ring 28 Direct Message feature 117 Direct One-touch Answering 35 Direct Outside (CO) Line Access 51 Directed Call Pickup 37 DISA AA Service 106 DISA AA Wait Time [517] 233 DISA Built-in AA [501] 229 DISA Busy Mode [506] 230 DISA Delayed Answer Time [504] 229 DISA Incoming Assignment [516] 232 DISA Incoming Call Dial Mode [500] 228 DISA Intercept Mode [507] 230 DISA IRNA to BVDay/Night/Lunch [438-440] 228 DISA No Dial Mode [510] 231 DISA Ring Time after Intercept [509] 230 DISA Ring Time before Intercept [508] 230 DISA Ringback Tone [531] 235 DISA Security Code [512] 231 DISA Security Code Digits [530] 235 DISA Security Mode [511] 231 DISA Tone after Security Code [518] 233 DISA Wait Time after OGM [505] 229 DISA > Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 28, 106 Disconnect Time [422] 224 Display Information 139
Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) [426] (New Zealand only) 226 Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand 20 DND Override 34 DND Override [609] 238 DND Tone 261 DND > Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) 30 Do Not Disturb (DND) 34 Door Open 101 Door Open Duration [709] 247 Door OpenerDay/Night/Lunch [703-705] 245 Doorbell/Door Chime 102 Doorphone Access Tone [707] 246 Doorphone Call 100 Doorphone Chime Assignment [711] 247 Doorphone Chime Pattern [712] 248 Doorphone Chime Patterns 264 Doorphone Ring Time [708] 246 Doorphone Ring Tone Pattern [706] 246 Doorphone Ring/Chime [710] 247 Doorphone RingingDay/Night/Lunch [700-702] 245 DRD Pattern 2 and 3 Ring Tone [433-434] (New Zealand only) 228 DRD Ring Pattern 2 Extension AssignmentDay/Night/Lunch [427-429] 227 (New Zealand only) DRD Ring Pattern 3 Extension AssignmentDay/Night/Lunch [430-432] (New Zealand only) 227 DRD > Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand 20 DSS Console Jack Assignment [003] 195 DSS Lamp Mode [112] 202 DSS Off-hook Mode [126] 205 DTMF Integration [103] 200 DTMF Integration Port [102] 200 DTMF Receiver Check [107] 201 DTMF Time [210] 211
E
EFA > External Feature Access (EFA) 84 Electronic Station Lockout > Extension Lock 70 Emergency Call 42 Emergency Number [309] 213 Entering Characters 190 Entering Manager Programming Mode 189 Entering System Programming Mode 189 Exception Code Tables 64 Exclusive Call Hold 90 Executive Busy Override 62 Executive Busy Override [608] 238 Executive Busy Override Deny 62 Extension Controlling Features 155 Extension Feature Clear 155 Extension Group [600] 236 Extension Jack Configuration 160 Extension Lock 70 Extension LockCANCEL ALL 70 Extension Name [604] 237 Extension Name in Cyrillic [616] 241 Extension Number [009] 197 Extension Ring Tone Pattern [115] 203 Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration [212] 211 Extension-to-Outside (CO) Line Call Duration 85
Feature Guide
267
Index
External Feature Access (EFA) 84 External Pager Access Tone [106] 201
F
Fault Recovery/Diagnostics 183 FAX Connection [503] 229 FAX Tone Detection [514] 232 Feature Guide References 2 Feature Highlights 5 Feature Numbering 175 Firmware Upgrade 182 Firmware Version [998] 256 Fixed Buttons 133 Flash/Recall 83 Flash/Recall Key Mode [110] 202 Flash/Recall Mode for a Locked Extension [108] 201 Flash/Recall Time [418] 223 Flexible Buttons 135 Flexible Outward DiallingDay/Night/Lunch [405-407] 220 Flexible RingingDay/Night/Lunch [408-410] 220 FWD to Outside (CO) Line 31 FWD > Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) 30 FWDAll Calls 31 FWDBusy/No Answer 31 FWDFollow Me 31
Incoming/Outgoing Call Selection for Printing [802] 249 Installation Manual References 2 Installing and Starting KX-TE Maintenance Console 187 Intercept Routing 15 Intercept RoutingNo Answer (IRNA) 15 Intercept RoutingNo Dial 15 Intercept Time for Internal DISA [515] 232 Intercom Call 39 Intercom Call Features 39 Inter-digit Time [208] 210 Internal Call Features 16 Internal Pulse Detection [614] 240 Introduction 186 IRNA > Intercept RoutingNo Answer (IRNA) 15 Itemised Billing Code 75 Itemised Billing Code [389] 217
K
KX-T7700 Series Incoming Lamp Control [968] KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling 56 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling [013] 199 255
L
Last Number Redial 57 LCD Language [615] 240 LCD Time Display [010] 197 LCS Recording Mode Set [620] 242 LED Indication 137 Line Preference Override 50 Line PreferenceIncoming 36 Line PreferenceOutgoing 50 Live Call Screening (LCS) 143 Lockout 85 Log-in/Log-out 29
G
General Call Hold Group 162 Group Call Pickup 90 37
H
Handset/Headset Selection > Headset Operation 81 Hands-free Answerback 38 Hands-free Operation 78 Headset Operation 81 Hold Recall 90 Hold Recall Time [200] 209 Holding Features 90 Hookswitch Flash Timing Range [207] 210 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a 47 Host PBX) Host PBX Access Code [403] 219 Hot Line 60 Hot Line Waiting Time [203] 209 Hunting Group Set [100] 199 Hunting Type [101] 199
M
Making Call Features 39 Memory Dialling Features 53 Memory Dialling FeaturesOVERVIEW 53 Message Features 126 Message Waiting 126 Message Waiting for Another Extension [618] 241 Message Waiting for Another Extension Lock 126 Microphone Mute 80 Music on Hold 94 Music on Hold [111] 202
I
Idle Extension Hunting 23 Idle Line Preference 50 Incoming Call Features 14 Incoming Call Indication Features 17 Incoming Call Indication FeaturesOVERVIEW 17 Incoming Call Log 123 Incoming Call Log Display Lock 124 Incoming Outside (CO) Line Call Features 14 Incoming Reverse [153] 208
N
No Dial Disconnection [211] 211 No Line Preference 36, 50
O
OGM Mute Time [519] 233 One-touch Dialling 55 One-touch Transfer 88 One-touch Transfer Using a DSS Button [005] Operator Assignment [008] 196 Operator Call 168
195
268
Feature Guide
Index
Operator/Manager Features 167 Optional Device Features 100 Outgoing Message (OGM) for DISA/UCD 105 Outside (CO) Line Access 51 Outside (CO) Line Call Features 41 Outside (CO) Line Call FeaturesOVERVIEW 41 Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation 85 Outside (CO) Line Group Access 51 Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection 18 Outside-to-Outside (CO-to-CO) Line Call Duration 85
P
Paging 99 Paging Deny 99 Paging Features 99 PagingAll Extensions 99 PagingAll Extensions & External 99 PagingExternal 99 PagingGroup 99 Parallelled Telephone 86 Parallelled Telephone [610] 239 Password Security 186 Pause Insertion 46 Pause Time [417] 223 PC Programming 169, 187 Personal BV OGM 114 Pickup Dialling > Hot Line 60 Pickup Group [127] 205 Polarity Reverse Detection [424] 225 Polarity Reverse Detection > Reverse Circuit 45 Power Failure Connections 183 Power Failure Restart 184 Power Failure Transfer 183 Prime Line Preference 36, 50 Programming Instructions 185, 188 Programming Procedures 193 Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 133 PT Programming 172, 188 PT Programming References 2 PT > Proprietary Telephone (PT) Features 133 Pulse Restriction [118] 204 Pulse Speed [402] 219 Pulse to Tone Conversion 44
Ring Tone Patterns 263 Ring Tone Patterns Sent from the Telephone Company (New Zealand 263 only) Ringback Tone Pattern [128] 205 Ringback Tones 261 Ringing Line Preference 36 Room Monitor 79 Room Monitor [612] 239 Route 1-4 Authorisation Code [381-384] 217 Route 1-4 Exception Code [355-358] 215 Route 1-4 Itemised Billing [385-388] 217 Route 1-4 Selection Code [351-354] 214
S
Saved Number Redial 57 S-CO Line Access 51 Second Feature Numbering Plan [012] 198 Secret Number SMDR Print Suppression [803] 249 Seizing a Line Features 49 Seizing a Line FeaturesOVERVIEW 49 SLT Caller ID [628] 244 SLT Caller ID Line Access Number [151] 208 SLT Caller ID Signalling Type [150] 208 SLT Fixed Bell Pattern [629] 244 SLT Hold Mode [104] 200 SLT Message Waiting [619] 242 SLT Ring Bell-on Time [143] 207 SLT Ring Wait Time for New Call [627] 244 SLT Ring/Silence Ratio [142] 206 SMDR Account Code [805] 250 SMDR Language [806] 250 SMDR Mode for Printing [929] 254 SMDR Parameter [801] 249 SMDR RS-232C Parameter [800] 248 SMDR > Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 149 SMS Centre Number for Receiving [145] 207 SMS Routing TableCO [146] 207 SMS Routing TableExtension [147] 208 SMS > Short Message Service (SMS) 129 Speed DiallingPersonal/System 58 Station Feature Clear > Extension Feature Clear 155 Station Hunting > Idle Extension Hunting 23 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 149 Station Programme Clear > Extension Feature Clear 155 Station Speed Dialling > Personal Speed Dialling 58 System Configuration and Administration Features 159 System ConfigurationHardware 160 System ConfigurationSoftware 161 System Data Clear [999] 256 System Data Control 169 System Data Dump [804] 249 System Password [002] 194 System Requirements 187 System Speed Dialling Name [011] 198 System Speed Dialling Number [001] 193
Q
Quick Dialling 59
R
Receiving Calls 35 Receiving Group Features 23 Redial 57 Redialling after Pulse to Tone Conversion [119] 204 Remote Extension Lock 70 Remote Station Lock Control > Remote Extension Lock Remote Timed Reminder 156 Reorder Tone 261 Required Telephone 188 Reverse Circuit 45 Ring Tone Pattern Selection 19
70
T
TAM Extension [611] 239 TAM > Call Retrieving from a Telephone Answering Machine (TAM) 37
Feature Guide
269
Index
Terminated Hunting 23 Time Service 164 Time Service Start Time [007] 196 Time Service Switching Mode [006] 196 Timed Reminder 156 Toll Restriction (TRS) 64 Toll Restriction (TRS) Features 64 Toll Restriction (TRS) Override by Account Code 68 Tones/Ring Tones 260 Transfer Recall 88 Transfer Recall Time [201] 209 Transferring Features 88 TRS Check after Answering [966] 255 TRS Check for * and # [125] 205 TRS Check Time after Answering [967] 255 TRS for System Speed Dialling 65 TRS > Toll Restriction (TRS) Features 64 TRS-COSDay/Night/Lunch [601-603] 236 TRSCOS 2-5 Denied Code [302-305] 212 TRSException Code [306] 213 TRSExtension Lock Class [312] 214 TRSSystem Speed Dialling Class [301] 212
U
UCD Busy Mode [523] 234 UCD Busy Waiting Time [521] 233 UCD Group [520] 233 UCD Intercept Mode [524] 234 UCD OGM Message Interval Time [522] 234 UCD Ring Time after Intercept [526] 234 UCD Ring Time before Intercept [525] 234 UCD Waiting Message [527] 235 Unattended Conference 97 Unattended Conference Recall 97 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 25 User Manual References 2
V
VM 1 APT Port [130] 206 VM 2 APT Port [131] 206 VM > Voice Mail Features 140 Voice Mail APT Integration 140 Voice Mail Features 140 Voice Mail Inband (DTMF) Integration
146
W
Walking COS 71 Warning Tone (Outside (CO) Line Call Limitation) 262
270
Feature Guide
Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd.

1-62, 4-chome, Minoshima, Hakata-ku, Fukuoka 812-8531, Japan
Copyright: This material is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. 2004 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
PSQX3083ZA KK1004MN0

KX-Tes824 Feature Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

KX-Tes824 Feature Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

KX-Tes824 Feature Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Advanced Hybrid System

Section 1, Call Handling Features

Section 2, System Configuration and Administration Features

Section 3, Programming Instructions

References Found in the Feature Guide

Feature Guide References

User Manual References

Links to Other Pages and Manuals

COS CPC DIL DISA DND DRD DSS DTMF

EFA FWD G-CO IRNA LCS LED O-CO OGM PF PSTN PT

S-CO SLT SMDR SMS

TRS TAM UCD VM VPS

Internal Call Features.......................................................................................................16 Incoming Call Indication Features .................................................................................... 17

1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.3 1.3.1

Answering Features.......................................................................................................35 Answering Features .........................................................................................................35

Making Call Features .....................................................................................................39 Intercom Call Features .....................................................................................................39

Outside (CO) Line Call Features ......................................................................................41

Seizing a Line Features ...................................................................................................49

Memory Dialling Features ............................................................................................. 53 Memory Dialling Features ................................................................................................53

System Configuration and Administration Features ...................... 159

Programming Instructions................................................................. 185

3.1 3.1.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2

Appendix ............................................................................................. 257

4.1 4.1.1 4.2 4.2.1

Index .......................................................................................................... 265

Call Handling Features

1.1 Incoming Call Features

Incoming Call Features

CO Line ModeDay/Night/Lunch [414-416]

Feature Guide References

1.1 Incoming Call Features

Intercept RoutingNo Answer (IRNA)

Feature Guide References

1.1 Incoming Call Features

Internal Call Features

1.1 Incoming Call Features

Incoming Call Indication Features

LED (Light Emitting LED Indication Diode) Display (Caller Information)

Tone During a Conversation

1.1 Incoming Call Features

Outside (CO) Line Ringing Selection

User Manual References

1.1 Incoming Call Features

Ring Tone Pattern Selection

S-Double (Doorphone only)

Feature Guide References

1.1 Incoming Call Features

Distinctive Ring Detection (DRD) for New Zealand

Pattern 1 (Normal) Pattern 2 (Voice) Pattern 3 (Modem/Voice) Pattern 4 (Fax)

Ring Tone Pattern assigned in CO Line Ring Tone Pattern [423]

Feature Guide References

1.1 Incoming Call Features

1.15.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 4.2.1 Tones/Ring Tones

1.1 Incoming Call Features

Feature Guide References

User Manual References

1.2 Receiving Group Features

Receiving Group Features

1.2 Receiving Group Features

Feature Guide References